ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM

ROUTING SWITCHER RS-422A REMOTE ROUTING SWITCHER

DVS-128 DVS-RS1616
DIGITAL AUDIO ROUTING SWITCHER TIME CODE ROUTING SWITCHER

DVS-A3232 DVS-TC3232
DIGITAL VIDEO ROUTING SWITCHER ANALOG AUDIO ROUTING SWITCHER

DVS-V1616 BVS-A3232
HD ROUTING SWITCHER ANALOG VIDEO ROUTING SWITCHER

HDS-V3232 BVS-V3232
DIGITAL VIDEO ROUTING SWITCHER

DVS-V3232B/V3232M
DVS-V6464B/V6464M
MULTI BIT RATE ROUTING SWITCHER

HDS-X3400/X3600/X3700
16-SOURCE CONTROL UNIT MULTI DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT
BKS-R1601 BKS-R1607/R1617/R1621
X-Y CONTROL UNIT MULTI BUS CONTROL UNIT
BKS-R3202/R3210/R3220 BKS-R3216
32-SOURCE CONTROL UNIT ROUTING SWITCHER CONTROLLER
BKS-R3203 BKPF-R70/R70A
UNIVERSAL CONTROL UNIT DIGITAL VIDEO 8 x 2 SELECTOR BOARD
BKS-R3204/R1608/R3209 BKPF-300
BKS-R1618/R3219 ANALOG VIDEO 8 x 2 SELECTOR BOARD
SOURCE AND DESTINATION CONTROL UNIT BKPF-301
BKS-R3205 DIGITAL AUDIO 8 x 2 SELECTOR BOARD
8-DESTINATION CONTROL UNIT BKPF-350
BKS-R3206 ANALOG AUDIO 8 x 2 SELECTOR BOARD
BKPF-351
INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR SYSTEM SETUP
1st Edition (Revised 5)
IBM and AT are registered trademarks of International Business Machines, Inc.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Windows NT is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Intel 80486SX is a trademark of Intel Corporation.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 Table of Contents

Manual Structure

Purpose of this manual .............................................................................................. 5

Contents ..................................................................................................................... 5
Related manuals ......................................................................................................... 6
DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series and DVS-V3232M/V6464M ..................................... 8

1. System Overview

1-1. Digital Routing Switcher System ................................................................ 1-1

1-2. System Control ............................................................................................ 1-3
1-2-1. Specifications and functions of control port .............................. 1-3
1-2-2. S-BUS control ............................................................................ 1-5
1-2-3. 9-pin remote control ................................................................... 1-7
1-2-4. Connection of control terminal .................................................. 1-9
1-2-5. Control of monitor S-BUS system ............................................. 1-9

2. Functions

2-1. Main Functions of Router System ............................................................... 2-1

2-2. Built-in Controller ....................................................................................... 2-2
2-3. Matrix Sizes ................................................................................................ 2-2
2-4. Number of Levels ........................................................................................ 2-2
2-5. Number of Units .......................................................................................... 2-2
2-6. Protect Function .......................................................................................... 2-3
2-7. Secret Function ............................................................................................ 2-3
2-8. Crosspoint Disable Setting Function
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232) ............................. 2-3
2-9. Password Function (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70, HDS-V3232) ... 2-3
2-10. Setting the Input/Output Name
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232) ............................. 2-4
2-11. Virtual Mapping Function
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232) ............................. 2-6
2-12. Free Assignment Function
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232) ............................. 2-7
2-13. Monitor Function (BKDS-V3292B only) ................................................... 2-8
2-14. Tie Line Management
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232) ........................... 2-10
2-15. Phantom Function ..................................................................................... 2-11
2-16. Self-Diagnosis Function ............................................................................ 2-12
2-17. Route Function .......................................................................................... 2-13
2-18. Enhanced Restriction of Selected Block (BKS-R1607/R3210 only) ........ 2-14

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 1

 3. Control Terminal

3-1. Selecting the Control Terminal ................................................................... 3-1

3-2. Control Terminal Display ........................................................................... 3-2
3-3. System Status Screen .................................................................................. 3-3
3-4. Menu Screen ................................................................................................ 3-4
3-4-1. Menu screen of the primary station ............................................ 3-4
3-4-2. Menu screen of the secondary station ........................................ 3-5
3-4-3. Menu screen of the primary station on monitor S-BUS ............. 3-9
3-4-4. Menu screen of the secondary station on monitor S-BUS ......... 3-9
3-5. Setting Screen ............................................................................................ 3-11

4. Setup Procedure

4-1. Outline ......................................................................................................... 4-1

4-2. Preliminary Information Before Installation ............................................... 4-2
4-3. Preparation Before Setup ............................................................................ 4-3
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures ............................................................................... 4-4
4-5. Flowchart of Setup .................................................................................... 4-24
4-6. Setting Up BKPF-300/301/350/351 .......................................................... 4-25

5. System Settings

5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station ........................................................... 5-1

A : DISPLAY CONTROL AREA ........................................................... 5-1
A : DISPLAY UNIT LOCATION ........................................................... 5-1
B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE .............................................................. 5-2
C : SET DESTINATION NAME ............................................................ 5-2
D : SET SOURCE NAME ....................................................................... 5-4
E : SET LEVEL TABLE ......................................................................... 5-6
F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER ........................................................ 5-7
G : UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER ............................................... 5-7
H : SET GLOBAL PHANTOM ............................................................... 5-8
J : NAME STYLE ................................................................................ 5-10
K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE ...................................................... 5-11
K : DEFAULT TABLE .......................................................................... 5-11
L : SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT ................................................... 5-11
M : SET INHIBIT TABLE ..................................................................... 5-13
N : SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP ............................................ 5-14
O : SET TIE LINES ............................................................................... 5-16
P : CHANGE PASSWORD .................................................................. 5-18
Q : CHANGE CROSSPOINT ................................................................ 5-18
R : CALL SECONDARY STATION .................................................... 5-20
S : SELECT INDICATION COLOR
(Except for BKPF-R70, HDS-V3232) ............................................. 5-20

2 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 T : SET CLOCK .................................................................................... 5-20
U : SELECT REMOTE .......................................................................... 5-21
V : SELECT WARNING DISPLAY ..................................................... 5-22
W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG ................................................................. 5-23
X : DISPLAY S-BUS COMMUNICATION ......................................... 5-23
Y : DISPLAY TABLE (Except for HDS-V3232) ................................. 5-24
Z : SET UNIT DETECTABLE ............................................................. 5-24
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station ..................................................... 5-25
A : SET UNIT LOCATION ................................................................... 5-25
G : UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER ............................................. 5-26
H : SET PHANTOM TABLE ................................................................ 5-27
K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE ...................................................... 5-29
K : DEFAULT TABLE .......................................................................... 5-29
L : COPY TABLE DATA ..................................................................... 5-29
M : SET MONITOR FUNCTION (Except for HDS-V3232) ................ 5-30
N : SET PANEL TABLE (BKS-R1601/R3202/R3203) ........................ 5-30
N : SET PANEL TABLE (BKS-R1607/R1608/R3204/R3205/R3209/
R3210/R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621) .................................... 5-31
N : SET PANEL TABLE (BKS-R3206/R3216) .................................... 5-32
O : SET AVAILABLE DESTINATION (BKS-R3202/R3206) ............ 5-33
O : SET AVAILABLE DESTINATION (BKS-R1607/R3210/R3216/
R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621) ............................................... 5-33
R : SET ROUTE (BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210/R3216/R1617/
R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621) .......................................................... 5-36
S : DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME ................................................. 5-37
U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL ................................................... 5-38
V : DISPLAY UNIT STATUS (Except for HDS-V3232) .................... 5-39
Y : DISPLAY TABLE DATA (Except for HDS-V3232) ..................... 5-39
Y : SET DISPLAY MODES (BKS-R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/
R3220/R1621) .................................................................................. 5-40
Z : SELECT SDI FORMAT (Except for HDS-V3232) ........................ 5-41
Z : SET PANEL STATUS (BKS-R3204/R3205/R3206) ...................... 5-42
Z : SET PANEL STATUS (BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210/
R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621) ................................... 5-43
Z : SELECT CONNECTION (DVS-RS1616 only) .............................. 5-46
Z : SWITCHING FIELD (HDS-V3232 only) ....................................... 5-46
5-3. Setting Items of the Primary Station on Monitor S-BUS
(BKDS-V3292B only) .............................................................................. 5-47
F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER ...................................................... 5-47
M : SELECT MONITOR FUNCTION .................................................. 5-48
R : CALL SECONDARY STATION .................................................... 5-48
5-4. Setting Items of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS
(BKDS-V3293B only) .............................................................................. 5-49
M : SET AVAILABLE MONITOR LINE
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B + BKDS-R3292B) .................................... 5-49
L : COPY TABLE DATA <MONITOR MENU> ................................ 5-49
N : SET PANEL TABLE
(BKS-R1607/R1608/R3204/R3205/R3209/R3210)
<MONITOR MENU> ...................................................................... 5-50
S : DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME <MONITOR MENU> ............ 5-51

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 3

 Z : SET PANEL STATUS
(BKS-R1607/R1608/R3204/R3205/R3209/R3210)
<MONITOR MENU> ...................................................................... 5-52
5-5. Backup of Setting Data ............................................................................. 5-54
5-6. When Data is Lost ..................................................................................... 5-54
5-7. Initialization of Table Data ....................................................................... 5-55
5-7-1. Initializing Procedure and Corresponding Items ...................... 5-55
5-7-2. Default Values Initialization .................................................... 5-56
5-8. Signal Switching Timing ........................................................................... 5-57

6. Confirmation of function

6-1. Outline ......................................................................................................... 6-1

6-2. Function Check Format ............................................................................... 6-2
6-3. How the Self-Diagnosis Items are Related ................................................. 6-3
6-4. Diagnosis Items for Each Model ................................................................. 6-4
6-5. Function Check Process .............................................................................. 6-5
6-6. Function Check with Control Terminal ...................................................... 6-6
6-6-1. System status screen after power on .......................................... 6-6
6-6-2. System status screen during the system operation ..................... 6-7
6-6-3. Menu item [W: SYSTEM STATUS LOG] ................................ 6-7
6-6-4. Contents and countermeasures of the error messages ................ 6-8

7. Change Information on DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series

and DVS-V3232M/V6464M

7-1. Outline (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series) ...................................................... 7-1

7-2. Changed Menu (Primary Station Setting Items) ......................................... 7-2
Initial screen (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series) ........................................... 7-2
A : DISPLAY CONTROL AREA (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series) ........ 7-3
B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series) ........... 7-3
E : SET LEVEL TABLE (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series) ...................... 7-4
O : SET TIE LINES (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series) .............................. 7-4
S : SET SOURCE ASSIGNMENT (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series) ...... 7-6
7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items) ..................................... 7-6
N : SET PANEL TABLE (HDS-X3400) ................................................. 7-6
V : DISPLAY UNIT STATUS (DVS-128) ............................................. 7-7
V : DISPLAY UNIT STATUS (HDS-X3000 Series) ............................. 7-8
Z : SET SDI FORMAT (HDS-X3000 Series) ......................................... 7-9
Z : SELECT SDI FORMAT (DVS-V3232M/DVS-V6464M) .............. 7-11

Appendix ......................................................................................................... A-1

4 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 Manual Structure

Purpose of this manual

This is the Installation Manual (software) for the Sony routing switcher system (it is
described as “router system” in this manual).
It contains information on the initial settings of the software when installing the
units making up the digital router system.
This manual is intended for system and service engineers. But operators can also
refer to it when setting and changing the system.
This manual is supplied with the following switchers.
DVS-V1616 DVS-V3232B DVS-V6464B DVS-RS1616
DVS-TC3232 DVS-A3232 BVS-V3232 BVS-A3232
HDS-V3232 DVS-V3232M DVS-V6464M DVS-128
BKPF-R70/R70A
HDS-X3000 series (HDS-X3400/X3600/X3700)

Refer to installation manual and/or maintenance manual supplied with each unit for
information on installing the hardware.

Contents
The following is a summary of the sections for understanding the contents of this
manual.

1. System Overview
This section outlines the basic structure of the digital router system and control
mechanism using the S-BUS.

2. Functions
This section explains the main functions of the digital router system.

3. Control Terminal
This section explains the key operation and image display of the control terminal.
Also describes how to use the personal computer as the control terminal.

4. Setup Procedure
This section explains the basic setting of DVS-V3232B/V6464B or HDS-V3232 as
a primary station.

5. System Settings
This section explains the setting menus of the primary station and the secondary
station and how to set each item in the menus, in detail.
Also it explains how to backup the table data.

6. Confirmation of Function
This section explains the error messages and how to check the operations of the
system after completing setting.

7. Change Information on DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series and DVS-

V3232M/V6464M
Describes the change information accompanied with addition of functions and
specification change.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5
Related manuals
In addition to this installation manual for system setup, the following manuals are
also available for the main units making up the system.

(1) DVS-V3232B/V6464B/V3232M/V6464M/128

. Operation Manual
(supplied with the DVS-V3232B/V6464B/V3232M/V6464M/128)
This manual explains the notes on operating, specifications, locations and
functions.

. Installation Manual (Hardware)

(supplied with the DVS-V3232B/V6464B/V3232M/V6464M/128)
This manual contains information on setting up the hardware when installing.

. Maintenance Manual Part 1

(supplied with the DVS-V3232B/V6464B/V3232M/V6464M/128)
This manual contains information on the periodic maintenance and servicing
information necessary for the principal block and board replacement.

. Maintenance Manual Part 2

(not supplied with the DVS-V3232B/V6464B/V3232M/V6464M/128)
This manual contains detailed information on the maintenance and servicing and
their parts (adjustment, board layout, schematic diagram, detailed parts list and so
on).
If this manual is required, please contact to Sony’s service organization.

. Protocol Manual
(not supplied with the DVS-V3232B/V6464B/V3232M/V6464M/128)
This manual contains information on the protocols used for controlling the routing
switcher system.
The following manuals are available for protocols used to support.
Please contact to Sony’s service organization to obtain a copy of the manual.

S-BUS PROTOCOL AND COMMAND SPECIFICATIONS

(S-BUS remote terminal control protocol)
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM PROTOCOL AND SPECIFICATIONS
(Sony cart protocol)

. DVS-V3232B/V6464B Series Technical Manual*1

(not supplied with the DVS-V3232B/V6464B/V3232M/V6464M/128)
This manual contains technical outlines of a digital routing switcher system
primary consisting of DVS-V3232B/V6464B information items.
If this manual is required, please contact to Sony’s service organization.
*1 : Common with DVS-V3232M/V6464M.

6 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 (2) DVS-V1616/A3232/RS1616/TC3232, BVS-V3232/A3232, BKS-R1607/
R1608/R3209/R3210

. Operation Manual (supplied with each unit)

This manual explains the notes on operating, specifications, locations and
functions of each unit.

. Maintenance Manual (supplied with each unit)

This manual contains information on the installation, maintenance, and servicing
of the unit and its parts (replacement, block diagram, adjustment, board layout,
schematic diagram, detailed parts list and so on).

(3) BKS-R1601/R3202/R3203/R3204/R3205/R3206

. Operation and Maintenance Manual (supplied with each unit)

This manual contains information on the proper operation and application of the
unit, installation, maintenance, and servicing of the unit and its parts (replace-
ment, block diagram, adjustment, board layout, schematic diagram, detailed parts
list and so on).

(4) BKPF-R70/R70A, BKPF-300/301/350/351

. Operation Manual (supplied with each unit)

This manual explains the notes on operating, specifications, locations and
functions of each unit.

. Installation Manual (supplied with each unit)

This manual contains information on setting up the hardware when installing each
unit.

. Maintenance Manual (not supplied with each unit)

This manual contains detailed information on the maintenance and servicing of the
unit and their parts (block diagram, adjustment, board layout, schematic diagram,
detailed part list and so on).

(5) HDS-V3232

. Operation Manual (supplied with the HDS-V3232)

This manual explains the notes on operating, specifications, locations and
functions of each unit.

. Maintenance Manual Part 1 (supplied with the HDS-V3232)

This manual contains information on the periodic maintenance of HDS-V3232 and
servicing information necessary for the principal block and board replacement.

. Maintenance Manual Part 2 (not supplied with the HDS-V3232)

This manual contains detailed information on the maintenance and servicing of
HDS-V3232 and their parts (board layout, schematic diagram, detailed part list
and so on).
If this manual is required, please contact to Sony’s service organization.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 7

 (6) HDS-X3400/X3600/X3700

. Maintenance Manual Part 1 (supplied with HDS-X3000 series)

This manual describes how to install and maintain the HDS-X3000 series, and
contains information on primary services (how to replace the main blocks and
boards, and other information).

. Maintenance Manual Part 2 (available on request)

This manual describes the information that premises the service board parts
replacement (board layouts, schematic diagrams and detailed parts list) of the
HDS-X3000 series.
If this manual is required, please contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service
Center.

(7) BKS-R3216/R1617/R3219

. Operation Manual (supplied with each unit)

This manual explains the notes on operating, specifications, locations and
functions of each unit.

. Maintenance Manual (available on request)

This manual contains information on the maintenance and servicing of the unit
and its parts (replacement, block diagram, adjustment, board layout, schematic
diagram, detailed parts list and so on).

DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series and DVS-V3232M/V6464M

Because functions are added and specifications are changed in the DVS-128, there
are several descriptions in section 1 to section 6 of this manual that do not agree
with the DVS-128. Refer to “Change information on DVS-128/HDS-X3000 series
and DVS-V3232M/V6464M” that is described in section 7 for the concrete change
information of the DVS-128.
For the contents of the DVS-V3232M/V6464M other than what are described above,
please read the “DVS-V3232B/V6464B” for “DVS-V3232M/V6464M”.

8 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 Section 1
System Overview

1-1. Digital Routing Switcher System

The system consists of the following units.

. Routing Switcher
(DVS-V1616/V3232B/V6464B/A3232/TC3232/RS1616, BVS-V3232/A3232, HDS-V3232)
It switches signals according to the command from the remote control unit. Varied switchers are
available for different types of signals used (serial digital video, digital audio, time code, RS-422A,
etc.)
. Remote Control Unit
(BKS-R1601/R3202/R3203/R3204/R3205/R3206/R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210/R3216/R1617/R3219/
R3280/R3281)
It switches signals and displays the name of the selected signal.
. Control Terminal
It sets the configuration and operation of the router system. It monitors the system in operation and
displays the messages.

A unique control protocol called S-BUS (Sony serial bus) is used for controlling the switcher system.
With this protocol, all control signals are transmitted by using one 75 Z coaxial cable. The transmission
path is called the “S-BUS data link”. Units on the S-BUS data links transmit data through time-divided
bi-directional communication.

Other than the S-BUS, the 9-pin remote control for RS-422A can also be used for this system. But the
system will function best when the S-BUS control is used. For DVS-V3232B/V6464B and HDS-V3232,
both protocols can be used together.

With cascade connection, several sets of routing switchers of DVS-V6464B/V6464M can be connected
together to expand the input/output matrix size. The inputs and outputs of DVS-V6464M can be expand-
ed up to 1024.

To operate this system, specified settings (making of table data) must be previously carried out using the
control terminal.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 1-1

1-1. Digital Routing Switcher System

Software Versions

This manual is intended for systems consisting mainly of the DVS-V3232B/V6464B digital video routing
switchers and units loading the following software versions and above.
When units other than these are used, some terminal displays will be different and some functions cannot
be used. Therefore, please contact to Sony’s service organization to upgrade the version of your software.

n
Use the same version software for the same models of routing switcher or remote control units on the S-
BUS data link. If different versions are used in one system, faults may occur.

The software versions described in this manual are the following.

. Digital video routing switcher DVS-V1616 : V3.00

. Digital video routing switcher DVS-V3232B : V2.10
. Digital video routing switcher DVS-V6464B : V2.10
. Digital audio routing switcher DVS-A3232 : V3.00
. RS-422A remote routing switcher DVS-RS1616 : V3.01
. Time code routing switcher DVS-TC3232 : V3.01
. Analog video routing switcher BVS-V3232 : V3.01
. Analog audio routing switcher BVS-A3232 : V3.01
. HD digital video routing switcher HDS-V3232 : V2.10
. 16-source control unit BKS-R1601 : V3.10
. X Y control unit BKS-R3202 : V3.10
. X Y control unit BKS-R3210 : V1.10
. 32-source control unit BKS-R3203 : V3.10
. Universal control unit BKS-R3204 : V3.11
. Universal control unit BKS-R1608 : V1.10
. Universal control unit BKS-R3209 : V1.10
. Source and destination control unit BKS-R3205 : V3.11
. 8-destination control unit BKS-R3206 : V3.11
. Multi display control unit BKS-R1607 : V1.10
. Routing switcher controller BKS-R70 : V1.01
. Digital video 8x2 selector board BKPF-300 : V1.00
. Analog video 8x2 selector board BKPF-301 : V1.00
. Digital audio 8x2 selector board BKPF-350 : V1.00
. Analog audio 8x1 selector board BKPF-351 : V1.00

n
To install the single status display unit BKS-R3280/R3281, please refer to the operation and maintenance
manual supplied with it.

1-2 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 1-2. System Control

1-2. System Control

1-2-1. Specifications and functions of control port

The DVS-V3232B/V6464B and HDS-V3232 digital video routing switcher is equipped with four kinds of
remote ports REMOTE 1 (S-BUS), REMOTE 2 (9-pin), REMOTE 3 (25-pin), and REMOTE 4 (monitor
S-BUS). Other switchers are equipped with three kinds of remote ports excluding REMOTE 4.

The specifications and functions of the control ports are as follows.

REMOTE 1 BNC 75 Z 47 kZ Z terminated

Protocol S-BUS control
Data Transfer Method BI-PHASE SPACE
Data Transfer Speed 312.5 kbps/1250 kbps*1
Max Cable Length 500 m/125 m*1 (BELDEN 8281 cable or equivalent)
FCS Data HDLC CRC-CCIT x16 + x12 + x5 + 1 Initial all high

Function With this port the communication between the primary and secondary stations is performed.
Remote control units, routing switchers and display units are connected to this S-BUS data
link in order to perform system functions.
REMOTE 1 is sometimes simply called “remote” for units having this remote port only.
To distinguish the S-BUS using REMOTE 1 from the monitor S-BUS (REMOTE 4), which
will be described later, it is called standard S-BUS or simply S-BUS.

REMOTE 2 D-sub 9-pin

Protocol RS-422A Flow control, 38.4 kbps, 100 Z /10 kZ
This port accepts three kinds of protocols.

Model DVS-V6464B DVS-A3232 DVS-RS1616 DVS-V1616

Protocol DVS-V3232B DVS-TC3232 BKPF-R70
HDS-V3232 BVS-V3232
BVS-A3232

CART PROTOCOL Yes Yes No Yes

AUDIO MIXER Yes Yes Yes No
PROTOCOL *2
PRODUCTION SWITCHER Yes No No No
PROTOCOL

Function With this port communication between two units is performed. A switcher, DME, etc. are
connected to this port. The functions of the router system using this RS-422A port depend
on a superior controller so that the system may not have so many functions as S-BUS
system’s.

*1: The specifications of BKPF-R70. When BKPF-R70 is used, termination resistors are necessary at both ends of the cable. The cable
cannot be checked for open circuit.
*2: Known before as switcher protocol.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 1-3

1-2. System Control

REMOTE 3 D-sub 25-pin (MODEM side pin arrangement)

Protocol RS-232C, 9600 bps*1, 8bit, No Parity, No check

Function With this port the communication between the primary station and the control terminal and
the setting of the units are performed. It is recommended that the control terminal be always
connected to the switcher set to the primary station, so that you can see error message of
the communication circuit and operation condition of units.
Although distorted displays may be shown when a terminal with low access speed is used,
does not mean that the routing system has failed. In this case, replace the control terminal
by one with high access speed. If not, it will be necessary to guess the contents of the
display on the screen.

REMOTE 4 BNC 75 Z 47 kZ Z terminated

Protocol S-BUS control
Data Transfer Method BI-PHASE SPACE
Data Transfer Speed 312.5 kbps
Max Cable Length 500 m (BELDEN 8281 cable or equivalent)
FCS Data HDLC CRC-CCIT x16 + x12 + x5 +1 Initial all high

Function Remote port for the monitor S-BUS. It forms a S-BUS data link, different from REMOTE
1, and carries out communication between the primary and secondary stations for the
monitor system (you cannot use this connector for the standard S-BUS). The data link
consists of switchers, remote control units, display units, etc.
To control the monitor S-BUS, the optional monitor board BKDS-V3292B is required.

n
The protocols of REMOTE 2 are selected using the control terminal connected to REMOTE 3.

*1: The transfer speed of BKPF-R70 is 38400 bps.

1-4 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 1-2. System Control

1-2-2. S-BUS control

The S-BUS control is a remote control system. It has a simple connection structure and provides highly
efficient communication. Multiple routing switchers and remote control units are connected to a single
bus line to form a control network called the S-BUS data link. The units on this S-BUS data link commu-
nicate with each other using the S-BUS protocol, select the necessary data from the control data transmit-
ted through the data link, and operate according to the data.
The routing switchers on the S-BUS data link are designated to a primary station which controls the
whole system (only one unit is set as this) and secondary stations. The primary station receives the
instructions from the secondary stations and makes adjustments for smooth communication. It also
constantly monitors the system and detects communication errors and problems. In addition to adjusting
and controlling communication, the primary station also switch crosspoints as another switcher does.
The S-BUS line is connected via the REMOTE 1 connector. Up to one line can be connected for BKPF-
300/301/350/351, two lines for DVS-V1616, three lines for DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and
HDS-V3232, and four lines for other switchers. Always terminate unused connectors with 75 Z.

Features of S-BUS control system

The main features of the S-BUS control are as follows.

. LAN type control signal communication using one 75 Z coaxial cable (S-BUS line).
. The coaxial cable can be extended to 500 m. (BELDEN 8281 cable or equivalent)
. The primary station can control up to 254 units (including the primary station)*1 of routing switchers
and remote control units using multiple S-BUS lines.
. Up to 128 units of routing switchers and remote control units can be connected to one S-BUS line.
Without stopping the system, the switchers and remote control units can be connected to the S-BUS
line or removed from it.
. The self-diagnosis results of the system can be monitored with the control terminal connected to the
primary station.

Basic configuration of S-BUS control

S-BUS control is configured as follows.

Name Equipment Quantity Function

*2
Primary station Routing switcher (M) 1 Communication control in data link.
Secondary station Remote control unit and routing 253 max. Use data link in the time specified
switcher (S)*3 from the primary station.
Control terminal Personal computer with terminal 1 Setting needed for system configuration
software and displaying the status.

*1 : When one of the BKPF-300 series is set in a primary station, it can control up to 30 units (including the primary station).
*2 : It means a switcher which is set the M/S switch on CPU board to “M” position. In the case of BKPF-R70, the switch is set to “P”
position.
*3 : It means a switcher which is set the M/S switch on CPU board to “S” position.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 1-5

1-2. System Control

Example of S-BUS control system connection

Control : S-BUS
Terminal : Signal Line
: RS-232C
Personal computer with a
communication software or : T Bridge (A)
Windows 3.1 installed *1
: T Bridge (B)
: 75 Z Terminator *3
Primary : Matrix Level
Station Level 1 REMOTE 3

Video Routing Switcher

DVS-V64646B <Video> Destination VTR
(M)*2
REMOTE 1
REMOTE 1
REMOTE 1

<Audio Channel 1/2>

<Audio Channel 3/4>
<Time Code>
<Video>

Secondary
Station
Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 8
Maximum
253 units
Audio Routing Switcher Audio Routing Switcher Time Code Routing Switcher
DVS-A3232 DVS-A3232 Routing Switcher (S)*2
(S)*2 (S)*2 DVS-TC3232
(S)*2

<Audio Channel 1/2>

<Audio channel 3/4>
Source
<Time Code>
VTR Display Unit
BKS-R3280

Level 1 Level 1

Display Unit
Video Routing Switcher Video Routing Switcher BKS-R3281
DVS-V6464B DVS-V3232B
(S)*2 (S)*2

Remote Control Unit

BKS-R1608
Remote Control Unit Remote Control Unit
BKS-R3210 BKS-R1607
Maximum
128 unit Remote Control Unit
BKS-R3209
Remote Control Unit Remote Control Unit
BKS-R3209 BKS-R3209
Remote Control Unit
BKS-R3209
Remote Control Unit Remote Control Unit
BKS-R3209 BKS-R3209

Either one of the REMOTE 1 connectors of the secondary station routing switchers can be used.
*1: The function switch will be not working in the terminal mode of the Windows 95/NT.
*2: (M) and (S) mean the setting of M/S switch on the CPU board.
*3: Connect the 75 Z terminators to the T type bridge of the last device on a S-BUS data link and to the unused REMOTE 1 connector.
1-6 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
 1-2. System Control

1-2-3. 9-pin remote control

The Sony digital routing switcher can be controlled from external control units connected to the RE-
MOTE 2 (D-sub 9-pin) using RS-422A. For DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232, the
functions performed by 9-pin remote control, can especially be upgraded to a great extent. The following
three kinds of 9-pin remote protocols can be used.

. Sony production switcher protocol

. Sony audio mixer protocol
. Sony cart protocol

n
The protocol that can be used depends on the models (refer to Section 1-2-1).
BKPF-R70 is controlled by Sony cart protocol only.

The DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232 can be switched between the “direct mode” in
which they are controlled directly and to the “S-BUS conversion mode” in which cart protocol commands
are converted to the S-BUS protocols.
In the direct mode, the switchers can be controlled individually. In the S-BUS conversion mode, up to
254 switchers on the S-BUS line (including the primary station) can be controlled.
For DVS-V3232B/V6464B/V1616/A3232 and HDS-V3232, the S-BUS and 9-pin remote control lines
are connected to REMOTE 1 and 2 respectively and can be switched freely. Other switchers can be
connected to either control line.

m
1. In the direct mode, the protect and secret functions set on the S-BUS protocol are not avail able.
2. In the S-BUS conversion mode, the “UA2” data specified by the cart protocol will be converted to
the level values on S-BUS protocol.
In this mode, the protect and secret functions set on S-BUS protocol are available. (However, these
functions cannot be set on the 9-pin remote control and the contents of the setting cannot be checked,
either.)
3. The number of input/output signals that can be controlled on each protocol is as follows.

Protocol Control Area

*1
Cart Protocol Cart 1-16
Cart plus 1-256
Audio mixer protocol 1-128
Production Switcher Protocol 1-127

4. When several DVS-V6464Bs are connected in a cascade and the input bus number is in creased, if
controlled by the 9-pin remote, there is the case no signal is output.
To avoid such case, use the S-BUS conversion mode.

*1 : There are two kinds of cart protocol due to the control area.
Unless otherwise noted, “cart protocol” in this manual mean the cart plus protocol.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 1-7

1-2. System Control

The following is an example of a 9-pin remote control connection.

System Console

Main Controller
(Host CPU) Printer

Local disk

Sub Controller Sub Controller

(Interface Unit) (Interface Unit)

RS-422A RS-422A

Status Display Status Display Status Display Status Display

Remote Control Remote Control Remote Control Remote Control

Unit Unit Unit Unit
REMOTE 2

REMOTE 2

Remote Control Remote Control Remote Control Remote Control

Unit Unit Unit Unit

REMOTE 1 REMOTE 1

DVS- DVS- DVS- DVS- DVS- DVS-

DVS-V3232B V6464B V6464B V6464B DVS-V3232B V6464B V6464B V6464B
(M) (S) (S) (S) (M) (S) (S) (S)

S-BUS S-BUS

DVS- DVS-A3232 DVS-A3232 DVS-A3232 DVS-

DVS-A3232 DVS-A3232 DVS-A3232 DVS-A3232 DVS-A3232
V6464B (S) (S) (S) V6464B
(S) (S) (S) (S) (S)
(S) (S)

: S-BUS : 75 Z terminator : Standard units making up Sony router system

: RS-422A : T bridge (M) and (S) mean the setting of M/S switch on the CPU board.

1-8 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 1-2. System Control

1-2-4. Connection of control terminal

Connect the control terminal to the REMOTE3 (D-sub 25-pin) connector of the primary station as shown
below. The control terminal is used for setting of the router system and for displaying the information of
errors, problems, system status, etc. during operation.
Use the personal computer installing the terminal software as the control terminal of the router system.

DVS-V6464B
Control terminal
(IBM PC/AT compatibles)

To D-sub 9-pin To REMOTE 3

connector connector

RS-232C cross cable (9-pin↔25-pin)

n
REMOTE 3 connector of BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232 is D-sub 9-pin connector.
When BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 is set to the primary station, connect the control terminal to the unit by
using the RS-232C cross cable.
The control terminal is not able to connect to the system which primary station is set to BKPF-300 series.

1-2-5. Control of monitor S-BUS system

DVS-V3232B/V6464B is able to monitor all the input and output signals when the optional monitor
board BKDS-V3292B is installed, whose CPU is used exclusively for monitoring. It forms a monitor S-
BUS data link via the REMOTE4 connector.
In this manual, the monitor control line is called “monitor S-BUS” to distinguish it from the control line
of the main S-BUS using for changing crosspoints. The main S-BUS is called “standard S-BUS” or
simply “S-BUS”. Excluding the system control, the monitor S-BUS has exactly the same protocol and
communication format as that of the standard S-BUS.

The input monitor and output monitor can be either used separately or combined. They can be also
connected in cascade. As the crosspoint control of the monitor is performed separately from the standard
S-BUS control system, a primary station for the monitor S-BUS must be designated in addition to that set
for the standard S-BUS.
The configuration of the monitor S-BUS is set with the control terminal connected to the primary station
on the standard S-BUS.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 1-9

1-2. System Control

The following shows one way of connecting the monitor S-BUS system.

<S-BUS>

Secondary Primary
Station (S) B type Station (M) A type
DVS-V6464B DVS-V6464B

(Max.
200 m)

(Inut signal)
Monitor
(Max. 200 m)

Secondary Secondary
Station (S) D type Station (S) C type
DVS-V6464B DVS-V6464B

(Max.
200 m)

(Output/Input signal)
(Max. 200 m)
Monitor

BKS-R3209

(M) (S) : M/S switch setting on the monitor Board.

BKS-R3209
: T Bridge (A)
: T Bridge (B)
: 75 Z Terminator
BKS-R3209

BKS-R3210

1-10 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 Section 2
Functions

2-1. Main Functions of Router System

1) The routing switcher is equipped with a system controller. It therefore does not require an
additional controller for controlling the routing switchers.
2) By the cascade connection, up to 512 x 512 crosspoints can be selected.
3) Up to 8 levels can be assigned.
4) Up to 254 units can be controlled in a system.
5) Each output signal can be protected so that they will not be switched by other control units.
(Protect function)
6) Each input signal can be prohibited to be selected from all the control units. (Secret function)
* 7) The inputs that can be selected for each output can be limited. (Crosspoint disable setting
function)
* 8) Password function
* 9) The either name of “Type + Number” or “Description” can be set for input/output connectors.
* 10) A crosspoint matrix can be mapped on a virtual matrix. (Virtual mapping function)
* 11) To each connector name, a different connector number can be assigned on each level.
(Free assignment function)
* 12) Input and output signals can be monitored using the optional monitor board BKDS-V3292B.
(Monitoring function)
* 13) You can enable the system to automatically select the signal lines between two routing switchers.
(Tie line function)
14) You can simultaneously switch several crosspoints. (Phantom function)
15) The control terminal connected to the primary station will display the system status informations
and error messages. (Self-diagnosis function)
16) When DVS-7000 is connected to the destination of DVS-V3232B/V6464B, the source name of
the routing switcher is indicated on the DVS-7000. (Route function)
17) BKS-R1607 and BKS-R3210 can restrict the crosspoint block of selection for each remote
control unit.

* : DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232 only (BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232 has no monitor function described
“12”).

DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232 outstanding offers new functions as a primary

station. To get the best out of the system, we recommend that DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or
HDS-V3232 is used as a primary station.
BKPF-R70 switches the crosspoint at a highest speed in the four switchers by mounted RISC CPU.

The following outlines each function. (For details of how to set them, refer to the Section 5 “System
Settings”.)

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 2-1

2-2. Built-in Controller
2-3. Matrix Sizes
2-4. Number of Levels
2-5. Number of Units

2-2. Built-in Controller

The Sony digital routing switcher incorporates a system controller and therefore does not require a
separate external controller. When several routing switchers are connected to the S-BUS, the CPU of the
switcher set as the primary station will control the whole system.

2-3. Matrix Sizes

By the cascade connection, input and output signals can be expanded to form a large-scale of router
system.
Maximum matrix sizes depend on the kind of switchers.

. DVS-V6464B : 512 inputs x 512 outputs

. DVS-A3232 : 256 inputs x 256 outputs
. DVS-TC3232 : 256 inputs x 256 outputs
. DVS-RS1616 : 128 inputs x 128 outputs (at 16 mode)
256 inputs x 256 outputs (at 32 mode)
. BKPF-300/350 : 112 inputs x 2 outputs
. BKPF-301/351 : 32 inputs x 2 outputs (BKPF-301), 1 output (BKPF-351)

n
DVS-V1616/V3232B, HDS-V3232 and BVS-V3232/A3232 are not able to connect by the cascade.

2-4. Number of Levels

The router system has the capability to control the different types of signal at the same time. This is
enabled by the level setting.
The router system can handle the signals such as video, audio, timecode and the RS-422A remote control
signal. These signals are switched by their exclusive switchers. The signals that perform switching are
allocated in the different layers. These layers are called levels.
In the router system, the different numbers are given to the input and output signals of the respective
layers that enable switching of various signals at the different levels simultaneously.
Example: Video can be set to level 1, audio to level 2, etc.

Up to eight levels can be set for one system.

The levels are set in the menu item [E : SET LEVEL TABLE].

2-5. Number of Units

Up to 128 remote control units and switchers can be connected to one S-BUS line. It is possible to
control up to 254 units (including the primary station) in total of all lines.

2-2 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 2-6. Protect Function
2-7. Secret Function
2-8. Crosspoint Disable Setting Function (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
2-9. Password Function (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)

2-6. Protect Function

Function which protects the crosspoint set so that it cannot be released using other remote control units.
While the protect function is on, the destination of the crosspoint to be protected will be fixed. Once the
protect is set, it will not be released by any command, except those from the control terminal and the
control unit used to set it. The protect function can be set and released freely from the control terminal
connected to the primary station.
The control terminal also has a password function which allows only certain users to operate the system.
The protect function can be set in the menu item [C: SET DESTINATION NAME].

2-7. Secret Function

Function which “hides” certain sources from all control units to protect the crosspoint set so that it cannot
be switched.
Unlike the protect function that limits the destinations, the secret function limits the sources to protect
them from being selected by other control units.
The secret function can be set in the menu item [D: SET SOURCE NAME].

2-8. Crosspoint Disable Setting Function (DVS-V3232B/V6464B,

BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)

Function that limits the sources that can be selected for each destination. It can also be used to fix the area
of crosspoints selected so that only certain sources can be selected for certain destinations. This function
can be only used when a DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 is assigned as the primary
station.
This function can be set in the menu item [M: SET INHIBIT TABLE].

2-9. Password Function

(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)

The control terminal can set all configuration items of the routing switcher system. It therefore has a
password function which allows only certain users to operate it. The password can be set in the menu item
[P: CHANGE PASSWORD].

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 2-3

2-10. Setting the Input/Output Name (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)

2-10. Setting the Input/Output Name

(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)

The following names can be used for the input/output connectors of the routing switcher.

1. “Type+Number” name
2. ”Description“ name

There are altogether three kinds of numbers that can be set as input/output numbers. These are “physical
number”, “connector number”, and “virtual number”.
The physical number and connector number are the number of connectors attached to the switcher. For a
DVS-V6464B, it is 1 to 64. For a DVS-V3232B, it is 1 to 32. The difference between the physical
number and connector number is that the connector number is used for each switcher frame, while the
physical number is used for one router system that is either single frame or multiple cascading frames.
Usually the physical number is used for the S-BUS control system, while the connector number is used
for the RS-422A (9-pin remote) control system.
The virtual number is the numbers assigned when switchers are mapped on a virtual matrix with 512
inputs and 512 outputs. The numbers will not duplicate even if several switchers are mapped on the
virtual matrix. Unless otherwise noted, the input/output number in this manual means the virtual number.
INPUT

Virtual number 152 88 25 18 9 1

1
DVS-V1616
(LEVEL-1)

5
DVS-V1616
(LEVEL-8)

10

OUTPUT
Physical number 128 65 64 1
12
(Connector number) (64) (1) (64) (1) 1

DVS-V6464B DVS-V6464B

(64) 64
75

(Connector number) Physical number

Virtual number
Virtual Matrix

2-4 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 2-10. Setting the Input/Output Name (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)

The name “Type + Num” consists of four alphabets and three numbers. It is assigned to the virtual
number. Sixteen kinds of letters can be set for the “Type” part. Number 1 to 999 can be used for the
“Num” part.
Examples: CAM 234, VTR 145

The name “Description” consists of any 16 characters and is assigned to the virtual number, e.g. “Tokyo”
and “Market”. Up to 1024 kinds of names can be registered. The 160 kinds of them are transmitted to the
remote control unit in order to set buttons and for displaying. The 160 names can be registered as one
group. Data of 8 groups can be registered at the primary station. The data of remote control unit can be
replaced by a group and the different data groups can be used for each remote control unit
Primary station (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, HDS-V3232)

Remote control unit

8 groups
No. 2 group
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
1 group for
No. 4 No. 2 group
each unit

No. 8

No. 4 group
1group : 160 names

Description Name

The name “Description” can be selected the “DESCRIP. NAME” in the menu item [J: NAME STYLE]
when a DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 is used as the primary station.
After the selection, set the description name in the menu item [C : SET DESTINATION NAME] or [D :
SET SOURCE NAME].

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 2-5

2-11. Virtual Mapping Function (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)

2-11. Virtual Mapping Function

(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)

Several routing switchers can be mapped on a virtual matrix with 512 inputs and 512 outputs in router
system. The matrix of one switcher can be also divided into several virtual levels and mapped.

For example, a switcher handling the 4:2:2 video signal and a switcher handling the 4 fsc video signal can
be mapped on the same level. By connecting them using a 4:2:2/4 fsc converter, the tie line control can be
performed (refer to Section 2-14).

DVS-A3232 has two modes such as 2-channel mode and 4-channel mode. Normally, either one will be
selected. However it is possible to use the overlapping area as the 4-channel mode by dividing the matrix
into two in the 2-channel mode and assigning them to the different virtual levels.
In the figure below, the 12 x 12 area where the level 2 and level 3 is overlapping is set to the 4 -channel
mode while the other is set to the 2-channel mode in the 20 x 20 area.

DVS-A3232 12 1
(2-channel mode) 1
Mapping to LEVEL-2 (1 to 20) LEVEL-3
32 20 12 1 (AUDIO-2)
1
20 12 1
12
1
LEVEL-2
12 (AUDIO-1)

12
20

20

32

Mapping to LEVEL-3 (1 to 12)

: 2-channel mode

: 4-channel mode

It is called “Virtual mapping” that you assign crosspoints using the virtual matrices and virtual levels in
this way.

This virtual mapping function can be set in the menu item [L: SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT] when a
DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 is used as the primary station.

n
When the matrix of a DVS-V3232B/V6464B is divided into two or more matrices on multiple virtual
levels, the monitor function for input/output signals may not work correctly.

2-6 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 2-12. Free Assignment Function (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)

2-12. Free Assignment Function

(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)

While the same input/output number can be assigned, through levels 1 to 8, for each input/output name,
different physical number can also be assigned on each level for an input/output name.
The following figure shows the case that DVS-V6464B is used for level 1 and DVS-A3232 for levels 2 and
3. To source IN002, physical number 5 can be assigned on level 1, physical number 2 on level 2, and
physical number 18 on level 3.
Similarly, to destination OUT004, physical number 32 can be assigned on level 1, physical number 32 on
level 2, and physical number 4 on level 3.

18
LEVEL-3
(AUDIO-2) 2
4
LEVEL-2
32 (AUDIO-1) 5
LEVEL-1 32
(VIDEO)

IN002 32

OUT004

This free assignment function can be set in the menu item [L: SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT] when a
DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 is used as the primary station.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 2-7

2-13. Monitor Function (BKDS-V3292B only)

2-13. Monitor Function (BKDS-V3292B only)

If a DVS-V3232B/V6464B is equipped with the optional BKDS-V3292B, any input/output signal can be
monitored. The input and output signals can be observed on different monitors or on the same monitor by
switching channels.
By connecting the monitor signals of several switchers in cascade form, all input and output signals can be
observed on one monitor.
The crosspoints of monitor signals are controlled by the monitor S-BUS (the control line similar to the
standard S-BUS although it controls only the monitor system).
The primary station on the monitor S-BUS is independent from the primary station on the standard S-BUS.
Therefore, several monitor S-BUS can be set to one system.
For example, switchers (P-2) and (P-3) in the figure on next page serve as the primary station on the
monitor S-BUS independently, while the switcher (P-1) serves as the primary station on the standard S-
BUS and monitor S-BUS.
Input Input

(Input) 128 65 64 1
1
Input Monitor
(Separate connection)

DVS-V6464B DVS-V6464B Output

(B Type) (A Type)
64

65

DVS-V6464B DVS-V6464B Output

(D Type) (C Type )

128
(Output)

Output Monitor (Separate connection)

or
Input + Output Monitor (Combined connection)

m
1. For DVS-V3232B/V6464B routing system, the primary station on the standard S-BUS and monitor S-
BUS should be the same.
However, for the monitor S-BUS which does not include the primary station on the standard S-BUS,
any switcher can be assigned the primary station.
2. BKS-R1601/R3203/R3206 cannot be used as a secondary station on the monitor S-BUS.

2-8 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 2-13. Monitor Function (BKDS-V3292B only)

BKS-R3204

DVS-V6464B DVS-V6464B
BKS-R3204
(P-1)
Cascade Connection

BKS-R3204

BKS-R3206

DVS-V6464B DVS-V6464B

75 Z
Terminate
75 Z
Terminate

DVS-V6464B DVS-V6464B
Cascade Connection

(P-2)

DVS-V6464B DVS-V6464B

75 Z
Terminate
75 Z
Terminate

BKS-R3204
: Standard S-BUS Line
: Monitor S-BUS Line
DVS-V6464B
BKS-R3204
(P-3)

75 Z Terminate

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 2-9

2-14. Tie Line Management (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)

2-14. Tie Line Management

(DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)

If the primary station is a DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232, by previously setting four

signal paths between routing switchers, unused signal paths can be selected automatically and protected
when input and output names are selected. This function is called tie line management. It is effective to
share the minimum number of converters (4:2:2:/4 fsc, 4 fsc/4:2:2, etc.).
For example, if both a 4:2:2 video switcher and a 4 fsc video switcher have 32 sources and destinations,
the converters can be shared using the tie line function and all sources and destinations can be handled
with the minimum number of converters.
Source group Converter

Net group

Converter

Net group
Routing Switcher
(4 : 2 : 2)

Routing Switcher
(4 fsc)

Destination group

Setting Procedure of the Tie Line

1. Set four input/output for each source/destination*1 group.

2. Set the four cables connecting the switchers for each net groups such as “OUT * * * _ IN * * *”.
3. Set the path from the source group to the destination (the path consists of the selected group names)

*1 : Source means the input signal. Destination means the output signal.

2-10 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 2-14. Tie Line Management (DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)

Operation example:
1. IN023 and OUT027 are selected from the remote control unit.
2. The CPU of the primary station detects IN023 from the source group. In the example below, the
corresponding group is S002.
3. Like for IN023, the CPU also detects OUT027. The corresponding group is D002.
4. The CPU of a primary station detects the path which has the S002 and D002 groups. In the following
example, the corresponding path is “3: S002-N004-D002”.
5. As N004 will be detected as the net group to be used, the CPU selects a usable element (not protect-
ed) from the four “OUT-IN” elements set in the N004 group, and the crosspoint is switched.
In the following example, if OUT033-IN230 is usable, the path IN023→OUT033→IN230→OUT027
will be selected.

SOURCE GROUPS NET GROUPS DESTINATION GROUPS

S001:IN003 N001:OUT003-IN200 N002:OUT013-IN054 D001:OUT023
IN004 OUT004-IN201 OUT014-IN055 OUT024
IN005 OUT005-IN202 OUT015-IN056 OUT025
IN006 OUT006-IN203 OUT016-IN057 OUT026

S002:IN010 N003:OUT023-IN007 N004:OUT033-IN230 D002:OUT027
IN015 OUT024-IN008 OUT034-IN231 OUT028
IN023 OUT025-IN009 OUT035-IN233 OUT029
IN027 OUT026-IN010 OUT036-IN234 OUT030
: : :
( 20 groups ) ( 40 groups ) ( 20 groups )

PATHS
1:S001-N001-N002-D001
2:S002-N003-D001
3:S002-N004-D002
:
( 20 paths )

2-15. Phantom Function

Several crosspoints can be switched simultaneously with just one push of a button of the remote control
unit. This is called the phantom function.
The phantom function is set using the control terminal connected to the primary station. The crosspoints
are switched by the remote control unit.
The group of crosspoints switched together is called the phantom group. Each remote control unit stores
the data of 57 crosspoints as the phantom group. In addition to the phantom function, in DVS-V3232B/
V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232, the data of 4095 crosspoints is stored in the primary station as the
other kind of phantom groups. In this manual, the registered phantoms in each remote control unit are
referred to as “local phantom”. Those registered in the primary station are referred to as “global phan-
tom”.
The global phantom function is available if a DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 is used
as the primary station.

n
The BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210 have the local phantoms of the destination offset type in addition
to the ordinary local phantom, that support the various switching.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with equipment for more details.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 2-11

2-16. Self-Diagnosis Function

2-16. Self-Diagnosis Function

The routing switcher performed self-diagnosis on the following items and displays the results on the
control terminal connected to the primary station.
O Presence of board and its sort
O Version of ROM on the control board
O Presence of backup power supply unit/backup CPU board
O Detection of fan rotation
O Display of reference signal
O Display of errors as follows
. Faulty crosspoint (hardware)
. Display of high temperature
. Display of S-BUS disconnection
. Display of required secondary station’s disconnection or fault
. Display of backup unit (control board or power supply unit)’s fault/recovery.

2-12 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 2-17. Route Function

2-17. Route Function

One of an application of Router is to expand number of Source inputs for DVS-7000 connecting with
DVS-V6464B, show below.

Route function is to display a source input chasing from a last program out even performing 4 times Re-
entry function with DVS-7000/DME. To display the actually selected source name, you must set the
route function with the control terminal. Then when you select the crosspoint set on the route function,
the source on the switcher A is searched for and the name is displayed. For example, when a crosspoint is
switched on the switcher A in the figure below, normally IN5 appears as the source name. If the route
function has been set, the source name selected on switcher A appears.
To activate the route function, set the destination of switcher A, destination and source of switcher B, and
level. In case of the figure below, set “OUT1 : OUT2 < IN5.”

When you use the route function, switching is possible with simple setting. For example if you select a
source (IN1) for a destination (OUT1) on switcher A , the crosspoint on switcher B (IN5-OUT2) is
automatically switched.
On the other hand, when you select a source (IN1) for a destination (OUT2) on switcher A, you have to
set a phantom, IN1 : OUT1 < IN1 previously. Then IN1-OUT2 is displayed if the phantom; IN1 is
selected.

(Source of switcher A)

IN 1 2 3 4 (Destination of switcher A) Expanded input (Source of swithcer B)

OUT1
(Destination of
IN 5 6 7 8 switcher B)
OUT2

DVS-V6464B (Level 1) DVS-7000 (Level 1)

Switcher A Switcher B

OUT2 controlling panel

1 2 3 4 6 7 8

Expanded input selection buttons Selection buttons

Phantoms are set to these button.

IN1 : OUT1 < IN1
IN2 : OUT1 < IN2
IN3 : OUT1 < IN3
IN4 : OUT1 < IN4
As OUT1 is included in switching setup data,
OUT2 < IN5 is switched automatically by Route function.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 2-13

2-18. Enhanced Restriction of Selected Block (BKS-R1607/R3210 only)

2-18. Enhanced Restriction of Selected Block (BKS-R1607/R3210 only)

If you define a certain number of outputs, you can vary a number of inputs which would not be capable
with the older panel.
This is applicable with BKS-R1607 and BKS-R3210.
Maximum 8 blocks can be defined.

Block Selected block of input Selected block of output

1 1 to 64 1 to 64
2 101 to 164 101 to 132

512 164 101 64 1

Block 1
(DVS-V6464B)

64

101

Block 2
(DVS-V6464B)

132

2-14 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 Section 3
Control Terminal

3-1. Selecting the Control Terminal

Load Windows 3.1 to an IBM PC/AT compatible machine (CPU: 80486 or a faster and more powerful
micro-processor, clock: 25 MHz or faster enough) and use it as a control terminal in the terminal mode of
Windows.
When using personal computers, codes F1 to F5 must be set to the Windows screen.

Key Name Command

F1 F1 ^ [ [ 17 ~
F2 F2 ^ [ [ 18 ~
F3 F3 ^ [ [ 19 ~
F4 F4 ^ [ [ 20 ~
F5 F5 ^ [ [ 21 ~
F6 _ _
F7 _ _
F8 _ _

It is possible to select codes F1 to F5 by using the cursor keys or using the [Ctrl] _ [Alt] _ [F||]
* key
combination.

Connect the personal computer to the primary routing switcher (REMOTE 3) using the RS-232C cable.

Symbols Used in This Manual

The symbols used for the control terminal keys in this manual are as follows.
(1) All keys are enclosed in boxes. (Ex. [Ctrl], [Return])
(2) The numerical keys in the text mean keys [0] to [9].
(3) The alphabet keys in the text mean keys [A] to [Z].
(4) The cursor key in the text mean the [(], [)], [&], and [*] keys.
(5) When two keys are to be pressed together, they are joined by the “_”. (Ex. [Ctrl] _ [X])

Functions of Keys Used for Setting

Character key: Insert the character pressed where the cursor is.
[*] : Move the cursor to the right one space.
[&] : Move the cursor to the left one space.
[Ctrl] _ [L] : Move the cursor to the right end of the character string.
[Ctrl] _ [A] : Move the cursor to the left end of the character string.
[Ctrl] _ [X] : Erase the whole character string being input and moves the cursor to the left end.
[BS] : Erase the character just before the cursor.
[DEL] : Erase the character at the cursor.
[Ctrl] _ [U] : Recover the characters erased with [BS] or [DEL] where the cursor is (up to 16 charac-
ters can be restored).
[Ctrl] _ [F] : Erase the character string input and recover the original state.
[Enter] : Fix the entered command and data (same as [Return]).

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 3-1

3-2. Control Terminal Display

3-2. Control Terminal Display

The control terminal display consists of the following three types of screen.
. System status screen : It displays messages while the router system is operating.
. Menu screen : It displays the menu for setting the router system.
. Setting screen : It displays the setting items of each menu.

System Status Screen

Monitor S-BUS Menu
and Setting Screen
[Ctrl] - [D]
[Ctrl] - [X] [Ctrl] - [X]

*2 *3
Menu Screen Menu Screen
[Ctrl] - [D]

*1 [Ctrl] - [E] [C *1 [Ctrl] - [E]

trl]
-[ [Ctrl] - [E]
D]

Setting Screen Setting Screen

Setting of the primary station Setting of the Secondary station

*2
Menu Screen Menu Screen
[Ctrl] - [Z]

*1 [Ctrl] - [E] *1 [Ctrl] - [E]

Setting Screen Setting Screen

Setting of the secondary station on Setting of the primary station on

monitor S-BUS monitor S-BUS

*1 : The menu items can be selected in the following two ways.

1. Select the desirable menu item using the cursor keys, and press [Enter].
2. Press the alphabet key allocated to each menu item.
*2 : To move from the menu screen of the primary station to that of the secondary station, execute the
menu item [R: CALL SECONDARY STATION] of the primary station.
*3 : To move onto the menu of the primary station on the monitor S-BUS, execute the menu item [M:
SET MONITOR FUNCTION] of the secondary station (set as the primary station on the monitor S-
BUS).

n
Monitor function is able to work by BKDS-V3292B only.

3-2 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 3-3. System Status Screen

3-3. System Status Screen

When the primary station is turned ON, the results of the self-diagnosis and ROM check sum value are
displayed as shown below.
If the result of the self-diagnosis is satisfactory, “OK” will be displayed at the corresponding item.
However if an error has been detected, this item will be the reversal characters.

Model Software version

SONY Digital Routing System DVS-V6464B V2.10

ITEM
ROM CHECK SUM 8A65
RAM READ AND WRITE OK
REFERENCE SIGNAL OK
S-BUS LINK TERMINATE OK
REAL TIME CLOCK

STARTED
1993.02.03-22.15 STARTED BY DVS-V6464B Ver2.10 IN STATION 1
1993.02.03-22.15 S-BUS LINK DISCONNECTED TO CHANNEL B
1993.02.03-22.15 MISSING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN STATION 1
1993.02.03-22.15 POWER SUPPLY UNIT B DOWN IN STATION 1

System Status Screen

When a message is output to the S-BUS data link, the system status screen will also show the time and
data of the event along with the message.

1990.10.12-15:42 S-BUS LINK DISCONNECTED

1990.10.27-09:28 STARTED BY BKS-R1601 Ver3.10 IN STATION 11
1990.11.03-05:31 STARTED BY BKS-R3204 Ver3.11 IN STATION 32
1991.01.14-13:51 MISSING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN STATION 1
1991.02.01-11:15 POWER SUPPLY UNIT B DOWN IN STATION 4
1991.02.04-06:11 X-POINT ERROR IN STATION 1

Messages of the System Status

If some error or event happens while you open a Menu Screen or a Setting Screen, then the message will
be displayed when you open the system status screen.

The display will change to the menu screen when [Ctrl] _ [X] is pressed.
To return to the system status screen, press [Ctrl] _ [X] again.

n
When [Ctrl] _ [X] is pressed, the menu screen will be opened.
At this time, if the password is required, input the password.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 3-3

3-4. Menu Screen

3-4. Menu Screen

3-4-1. Menu screen of the primary station

The menu screen shows all menu items for system setting in the table data of the primary station.
By selecting the items on the menu screen using the following procedure, the screen will show the setting
screen.
n
Compared with the system status screen, router system operations take more time, when the menu screen
or the setting screen is open. Therefore, please return to the system status screen after system setting.

The following are two methods of selecting the menu items.

1. Use the cursor keys to select the desired menu item, and press [Enter]. (Some models have no this
function. In this case, perform step 2. to select.)
2. Press the alphabet key assigned to each menu item.

The screen will return to the system status screen when [Ctrl] _ [X] pressed.

Primary station menu screen of DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 is as follows.

Model Software version

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1 Station address


MODIFICATION COMMAND

A: DISPLAY CONTROL AREA B: SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE
C: SET DESTINATION NAME D: SET SOURCE NAME
E: SET LEVEL TABLE F: SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER
G: UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER H: SET GLOBAL PHANTOM
J: NAME STYLE(Type + Num) K: RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE
L: SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT M: SET INHIBIT TABLE
N: SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP O: SET TIE LINES Menu item
P: CHANGE PASSWORD Q: CHANGE CROSSPOINT
R: CALL SECONDARY STATION

MAINTENANCE COMMAND

S: SELECT INDICATION COLOR(OFF) T: SET CLOCK
U: SELECT CONTROL MODE V: SELECT WARNING DISPLAY (ON)
W: SYSTEM STATUS LOG X: DISPLAY S-BUS COMMUNICATION
Y: DISPLAY TABLE DATA Z: SET UNIT DETECTABLE

Ctrl-X:QUIT SETUP MENU Short-cut key

Menu Screen of the Primary Station (Ex. DVS-V6464B)

n
. Menu screen of BKDF-R70 does not have the menu item [S].
. Menu screen of HDS-V3232 does not have the menu item [S] and [Y].

3-4 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 3-4. Menu Screen

3-4-2. Menu screen of the secondary station

To call the menu screen of the secondary station, select menu item [R: CALL SECONDARY STATION]
in the primary station menu and input the secondary station number.
To set the secondary station function of the routing switcher used as the primary station, input “1” as the
secondary station number.

The screen will return to the menu screen of the primary station when [Ctrl] _ [D] is pressed.

n
When the secondary station menu is called, the color function will become ineffective, even if [S: SE-
LECT INDICATION COLOR] has been selected to “ON”.

(1) Routing switcher

1 DVS-V1616

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU DVS-V1616 V3.00 STATION NUMBER 9

MODIFICATION COMMAND

A: SET UNIT LOCATION K: DEFAULT TABLE

MAINTENANCE COMMAND

Y: DISPLAY TABLE

Ctrl-D:RETURN

Menu Screen of the Secondary Station (Ex. DVS-V1616)

2 DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 2

MODIFICATION COMMAND

A: SET UNIT LOCATION G: UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER
K: RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE M: SET MONITOR FUNCTION
U: SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL

MAINTENANCE COMMAND

V: DISPLAY UNIT STATUS Y: DISPLAY TABLE DATA
Z: SELECT SDI FORMAT

Ctrl-D:RETURN

Menu Screen of the Secondary Station (Ex. DVS-V6464B)

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 3-5

3-4. Menu Screen

3 DVS-RS1616/TC3232/A3232, BVS-V3232/A3232

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU DVS-RS1616 V3.01 STATION NUMBER 7

MODIFICATION COMMAND

A: SET UNIT LOCATION G: UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER
K: DEFAULT TABLE

MAINTENANCE COMMAND

Y: DISPLAY TABLE Z: SELECT CONNECTION

Ctrl-D:RETURN

Menu Screen of the Secondary Station (Ex. DVS-RS1616)

n
DVS-TC3232/A3232 and BVS-V3232/A3232 does not have menu item [Z].

4 HDS-V3232

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU HDS-V3232 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 3

MODIFICATION COMMAND

A: SET UNIT LOCATION G: UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER
K: DEFAULT TABLE
U: SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL

MAINTENANCE COMMAND

Z: SWITCHING FIELD

Ctrl-D:RETURN

Menu Screen of the Secondary Station (Ex. HDS-V3232)

5 BKPF-R300/301/350/351

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKPF-300 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 13

SOURCE No. 0001-0008 DESTINATION No: 0001 LEVEL No.: 1

SWITCHING FIELD: ASYNC SDI FORMAT: 4:2:2

Ctrl-D:RETURN

Menu Screen of the Secondary Station (Ex. BKPF-R300)

3-6 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 3-4. Menu Screen

(2) Remote control unit

1 BKS-R3202

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3202 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 16

MODEFICATION COMMAND

H: SET PHANTOM TABLE

N: SET PANEL TABLE

O: SET AVAILABLE DESTINATION

L: COPY TABLE DATA

S: DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME

Ctrl-D:RETURN

Menu Screen of the Remote Control Unit (Ex. BKS-R3202)

2 BKS-R3204/R3205/R3206

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3206 V3.11 STATION NUMBER 18

MODEFICATION COMMAND

H: SET PHANTOM TABLE

N: SET PANEL TABLE

O: SET AVAILABLE DESTINATION

L: COPY TABLE DATA

Z: SET PANEL STATUS

S: DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME

Ctrl-D:RETURN

Menu Screen of the Remote Control Unit (Ex. BKS-R3206)

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 3-7

3-4. Menu Screen

3 BKS-R1607, BKS-R1608, BKS-R3209, BKS-R3210

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R1607 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 3

Å MODIFICATION COMMAND

H: SET PHANTOM TABLE

N: SET PANEL TABLE

O: SET AVAILABLE SOURCE/DESTINATION

R: SET ROUTE

L: COPY TABLE DATA

Z: SET PANEL STATUS

S: DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME

Ctrl-D:RETURN

Menu Screen of the Remote Control Unit (Ex. BKS-R1607)

n
BKS-R1608/R3209 does not have the menu item [O].

4 BKS-R3216, BKS-R1617, BKS-R1618, BKS-R3219, BKS-R3220, BKS-R1621

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3216 V1.03 STATION NUMBER 2

Å MODIFICATION COMMAND

H: SET PHANTOM TABLE

N: SET PANEL TABLE

O: SET AVAILABLE SOURCE/DESTINATION

R: SET ROUTE

L: COPY TABLE DATA

Z: SET PANEL STATUS

Y: SET DISPLAY MODES

S: DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME

Ctrl-D:RETURN

Menu Screen of the Remote Control Unit (Ex. BKS-R3216)

3-8 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 3-4. Menu Screen

3-4-3. Menu screen of the primary station on monitor S-BUS

To call the menu screen of the primary station on the monitor S-BUS, select menu item [R: CALL
SECONDARY STATION] in the primary station menu on the standard S-BUS. (The switcher set as the
primary station on the monitor S-BUS.)
Next, select menu item [M: SET MONITOR FUNCTION].

n
If a switcher except the primary station on the monitor S-BUS is selected, this menu will not be displayed
even if [M: SET MONITOR FUNCTION] has been performed.

DVS-V3232B/V6464B + BKDS-V3292B (Monitor board)

SET MONITOR FUNCTION DVS-V6464B Monitor Bus I/F V2.10

MODIFICATION COMMAND

F: SET SCTIVE UNIT NUMBER

M: SELECT MONITOR FUNCTION ( COMBINED )

R: CALL SECONDARY STATION

Menu Screen of the Primary Station on Monitor S-BUS (Ex. DVS-V6464B)

3-4-4. Menu screen of the secondary station on monitor S-BUS

To call the menu screen of the secondary station on the monitor S-BUS, call the primary station on the
monitor S-BUS in advance.
Select menu item [R: CALL SECONDARY STATION] and input the station number.

(1) Routing switcher

1 DVS-V3232B/V6464B + BKDS-V3292B (Monitor board)

SET MONITOR FUNCTION DVS-V6464B Monitor Bus I/F V2.10 STATION NUMBER 8

MODIFICATION COMMAND

M: SET AVAILABLE MONITOR LINE INPUT=( ENABLE )OUTPUT=( ENABLE )



Ctrl-Z:RETURN

Menu Screen of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS (Ex. DVS-V6464B)

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 3-9

3-4. Menu Screen

(2) Remote control unit

1 BKS-R3202

MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3202 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 14

MODIFICATION COMMAND

S: DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME



Ctrl-Z:RETURN

Menu Screen of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS (Ex. BKS-R3202)

2 BKS-R3204, BKS-R3205

MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3204 V3.11 STATION NUMBER 18

MODIFICATION COMMAND

N: SET PANEL TABLE

L: COPY TABLE DATA

Z: SET PANEL STATUS

S: DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME

Ctrl-Z:RETURN

Menu Screen of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS (Ex. BKS-R3204)

3-10 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 3-5. Setting Screen

3-5. Setting Screen

Set the items in the menu in the setting screen.

To call the setting screen, select the menu item with the cursor key or input it using the alphabet key, and
press [Enter].
(The same procedure for calling the setting screen is applied to both the primary station menu and
secondary station menu.)

The screen returns to the menu screen when [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed at each menu item.
Then if [Ctrl] _ [X] is pressed, the screen will return to the system status screen.

n
The setting screen of menu items “C“, “D”, “E”, “H”, “L”, “M”, “N”, “O”, and “Q” may differ according
to the source/destination name mode set at menu item “J”.

For the “Type + Num” mode:

. The name of the destination or source will be displayed in the form of type name and number.
. To set or change the name, select any name from the list displayed at the bottom of the screen and
then input it using the numerical keys.

For the “DESCRIP.NAME” mode:

. The name of the destination or source will be displayed in the form of the Description.
. To set or change the name, directly input it using the alphabet or numerical keys.

Unless otherwise noted, the setting screen used in this manual are that of the “Type + Num” mode.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 3-11

 Section 4
Setup Procedure

4-1. Outline

This setup procedure is written for the setup operator to understand the setup procedure, and more
importantly, the philosophy behind the setup. Time spent now, before actually sitting down at the Setup
Terminal will greatly enhance the flexibility of your router system (routing switcher system). If your
system is only comprised of DVS-V**** routing switchers the setup approach is much simpler, and
pretty strait forward. But, if your router system is comprised of more the one type of routing switcher
(AES/EBU, Analog Audio, or Video, Time Code, RS-422A Remote, etc.) it is very important that you
understand what you read in this procedure before you actually start the setup procedure.

A router system with different types of routing switchers should usually be thought of as a 3 dimensional
object. We will see in this procedure that in a few cases the old 2 dimensional model of a X-Y matrix
switch will do. But, the most flexibility is obtained by thinking of each type of routing switcher as a
separate, and distinct Z layer, or level (see figure 2).

Regarding detailed setup information, refer to the menus explanation in the Installation manuals chapter
on setup.

What we will do in this procedure is to:

1. Identify all in/out signals, and segregate them into 16 types of sources and destinations.
2. Assign virtual inputs, and outputs a “Type + number” name. (numbers start at 001 and go to 512
for both source, and destinations)
3. Assign each output “Type + number” name to one or more levels.
4. Assign each “Type + number” name to an actual physical in/out location.
5. Assign any needed phantoms (also known as “salvos”).
6. Decide which control units can be active on the S-BUS, and displayed in various diagnostic
modes.
7. Decide which inputs won’t be available at selected outputs.
8. Setup any “tie lines” needed.
9. Assign second naming convention (if desired).
10. Setup individual control units on the S-BUS data link.

Regarding steps 1 through 4, these are important steps (with step 2 being the longest, and most critical).
As an introductory explanation, it should be clear that we humans like to deal in names, while the S-BUS
control system deals in numbered labels, which the primary (main routing switcher frame) will translate
into actual physical inputs, and outputs. Many facilities will base the mnemonics used in all documenta-
tion based on the limitations imposed by routing switcher names, and display windows.

For details of setting information, refer to the Section 5.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 4-1

4-2. Preliminary Information Before Installation

4-2. Preliminary Information Before Installation

The control area of each switcher when used as the primary station is as follows.

Model Input control Output control Level Remarks

area area management

DVS-V6464B 1 to 512 1 to 512 1 to 8 Expansion possible

DVS-A3232
DVS-RS1616
DVS-TC3232
DVS-V3232B 1 to 512 1 to 512 1 to 8 Expansion not possible
DVS-V1616
BVS-V3232
BVS-A3232
BKPF-R70
HDS-V3232

Example : DVS-V3232B and HDS-V3232 have 32 inputs and 32 outputs. But when one of them set the
primary station, it can control up to 512 inputs and 512 outputs using the cascading secondary
stations.

. Be sure to set a station number for each routing switcher and remote control unit installed.
Refer to the manuals of each unit for how to set the station number.
. In this manual, the input signal is called source, and the output signal destination.
. When using two or more BKS-R1607, BKS-R3209 or BKS-R3210 for a mother and daughter configu-
ration (combined system), it is necessary to set DVS-V3232B /V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 as
the primary station.

4-2 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 4-3. Preparation Before Setup

4-3. Preparation Before Setup

1. Set a primary station

DVS-V6464B or DVS-V3232B is recommended as the primary station.
Set M/S switch on the CPU-149 board to “M” position*1.
Station ID automatically will equal one.
n
Set only one primary station.
If more than two are set as the primary, they will not work correctly.

2. Connect PC
Connect a IBM compatible PC with MS-DOS Ver. 6.2 to the Remote 3 on the primary, using RS-232C
cross-cable with 25-pin (male) and 9-pin (female) connectors*2.
Run terminal emulation software and communicate at 9600 bps*3.
The Terminal program associated with Windows 3.1 allows the mapping of control strings to virtual
function keys in the terminal program. Therefore, if your are using Windows 3.1 you can use it’s Termi-
nal program. Windows 95, and Windows NT have terminal emulation programs which do not have this
feature. If you are using a PC with Windows 95 or Windows NT, you must use a third party terminal
emulation program that allows control strings to be mapped to keys on the keyboard (usually the F1
through F12 function keys).

3. Turn on the power

Turn on the power of all equipment connecting on the S-BUS line.
n
Operation of the routing switcher may be unstable just after the power is turned on. Wait about one
minute of warm-up before starting the setup.

*1 : Set the P/S switch of the BKPF-R70 board to “P” position.

*2 : Use the cross-cable with 9-pin (female) and 9-pin (female) connectors for BKPF-R70.
*3 : Data transfer speed of BKPF-R70 is 38400 bps.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 4-3

4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

1. Identify all in/out signals, and segregate them into 16 types of sources and destinations
(1) Make IN/OUT list of each routing switcher

Make input/output list of each routing switcher referring to installation, or wiring diagram or other
documentation showing router interconnection. Figure 1 shows an example of a 3 router system. It is
composed of an SDI, AES/EBU, and a Analog routing switcher.

At this time consider the mnemonics that can be assigned to each of the inputs or outputs.
The DVS series routing switcher can accept up to 16 unique, 4 letter (maximum) pre-fix names, such as
CG, VT, VTR, CAM, NET, SAT, BARS, TONE, etc.. The default mnemonics are IN for the input side,
and OUT for the output side.

n
Type Name = Mnemonics

Each pre-fix type can have 1000 items associated with it (VTR000, VTR001, ....VTR999). These 16 pre-
fixes you generate will be used on both the input, and output sides. What this means is that each input, or
output to the routing switcher will be referred to in a “Type + number” format (see the examples in the
upper right hand corner of figure 1.

The same name (such as VTR001) can be assigned to a input, and to an output of the routing switcher.
But, a unique name can only be used once per input, and output. It is important that you consider careful-
ly your naming convention now, as it will be carried throughout the rest of the setup, and will be the name
displayed on control panels, and other displays. Actual Source and Destination descriptive names are
decided later.

n
There is a second naming convention that can be used in place of the “Type + number” format.
But it is necessary to first enter names under the just mentioned format, and add the second set of names
later (they do not erase the “Type + number” set). The second approach is called Descriptive Names. It
is explained in step 9.

Example :
VIDEO ROUTER SOURCE

Generic Source Name Connector Router Source Name

CAMERA 1 17 CAM001
CAMERA 2 18 CAM002
VTR 1 1 VTR001
VTR 2 2 VTR002

VIDEO ROUTER DESTINATION

Generic Destination Name Connector Router Destination Name

VTR 1 1 VTR001
VTR 2 2 VTR002
VTR 3 3 VTR003
VTR 4 4 VTR004

4-4 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

IN OUT
VTR 1 1 1 VTR 1
Name Types
VTR 2 2 2 VTR 2
VTR 3 3 3 VTR 3 VTR
VTR 4 4 4 VTR 4 CAM
VTR 5 5 5 VTR 5 SS
VTR 6 6 6 VTR 6 CG
VTR 7 7 7 VTR 7 SAT
VTR 8 8 8 VTR 8 NET
Studio A 9 9 Satellite 1 REM
News 1 10 10 Satellite 2 STU
Satellite 1 11 11 Remote 1 FS
Satellite 2 12 12 Network 1 NEWS
Network 1 13 13 News 1 PTCH
Network 2 14 14 News 2 DIG
Remote 1 15 15 Char Gen 1 MON
Remote 2 16 SDI 16 Char Gen 2 DAT
Camera 1 17 Routing Switcher 17 Cam Ret 1 MIX
Camera 2 18 18 Cam Ret 2 TEST
Camera 3 19 19 Cam Ret 3
Camera 4 20 20 Cam Ret 4
Still Store 1 21 21 Studio A Switch
Still Store 2 22 22 Studio A Switch
Char Gen 1 23 23 Studio A Mon
Char Gen 2 24 24 Studio B Mon
Frame Sync 1 25 25 Still Store 1
Frame Sync 2 26 26 Still Store 2
Studio B 27 27 News 3
Patch 28 28 Studio B Switch
Patch 29 29 Studio B Switch
Patch 30 30 Frame Sync 1
Patch 31 31 Frame Sync 2
A/D #1 32 32 D/A #1
DVS-V3232B

IN OUT
VTR 1 1 1 VTR 1
VTR 2 2 2 VTR 2
VTR 3 3 3 VTR 3
VTR 4 4 4 VTR 4
VTR 5 5 5 VTR 5
VTR 6 6 6 VTR 6
VTR 7 7 7 VTR 7
VTR 8 8 AES/EBU 8 VTR 8
DAT 1 9 Routing Switcher 9 DAT 1
DAT 2 10 10 DAT 2
DAT 3 11 11 DAT 3
A/D #1 12 12 D/A #1
A/D #2 13 13 D/A #2
Mixer 1 PGM 14 14 Mixer 1 In 1
Mixer 1 Aux 15 15 Mixer 1 In 2
SDI Demux Out 16 16 SDI Mux In
DVS-A3232

IN OUT
VTR 1 1 1 VTR 1
VTR 2 2 2 VTR 2
VTR 3 3 3 VTR 3
VTR 4 4 4 VTR 4
VTR 5 5 5 VTR 5
VTR 6 6 6 VTR 6
VTR 7 7 7 VTR 7
VTR 8 8 Analog 8 VTR 8
Audio
Mixer 2 PGM Out 9 Routing Switcher 9 Satellite 1
News 1 10 10 Satellite 2
Satellite 1 11 11 Remote 1
Satellite 2 12 12 Network 1
Network 1 13 13 News 1
Network 2 14 14 News 2
Remote 1 15 15 A/D #1
Remote 2 16 16 A/D #2
BVS-A3232

Fig. 1
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 4-5
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

(2) Assign Name Types (Menu Item [B])

Now select, and enter your 16 source and destination name pre-fixes.
Once again, up to 16 type names used for source/destination name are decided using 4 letters (except “;”).
Set using the menu item [B : SET SOURCE/DESTINATION TYPE].

Example : CAM, VTR, CG, DVE, MON, PGM, BLK, DAT, STL, TONE, CD, ...

If a consistent display format is desired, all name types should be the same length.

SOURCE/DEST/PHANTOM TYPE DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

0=VTR 1=VCR 2=AUX 3=FLM 4=TEST 5=STU 6=CAM 7=REM
8=CG 9=NETA A=ENG B=ED C=FS D=SS E=BARS F=PHAN

Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

2. Source/Destination names (Menu Items [C] & [D])

At this point another very important decision must be made as to how your router system is organized,
programmed, and ultimately able to be used. You should take some time at this point to read, and totally
understand the implications of what this step in the setup means for future routing switcher setup, opera-
tion, and flexibility. How you approach this step will greatly determine the flexibility your system will
afford in control panel operation, and ease of system modification.

Many router systems are not only comprised of a SDI routing switcher (DVS-V**** routing switcher
frames), but additional types of routing switchers as well. If you only have DVS-V**** type SDI
routing switchers the information presented is not as critical to your operation, but should be read for
background information anyway. These additional routing switchers usually are analog audio, and/or
video routing switchers. Other possible routing switchers include AES/EBU, Analog Audio, Time Code,
and RS-422 machine control systems. These other routing switchers are usually controlled by the SDI
“primary” frame. This will be the case if you are using this guide for router system setup.

These additional types of routing switchers can be thought of as “assets” (secondary stations) to be
managed by the primary. These “assets” are additional crosspoints for switching analog video, or audio,
time code, etc. Your method for controlling these additional crosspoints are generally though control
panels attached to the S-BUS. Your mix of control panels, and the number, and type of additional, or
secondary routing switchers will determine the approach taken for “mapping” all the various crosspoints
in the primary, and secondary routing switchers.

There are two general approaches that can be taken in “mapping” crosspoints.
Although either approach can be mutually exclusive of the other, generally a mixture of the two are used.

The first approach is called “level mapping”. There are sources where the digital (video), and analog
audio or video routing switchers should naturally follow one another (VTR’s for instance). With sources
that should follow, you can use “level mapping”, with the SDI routing switcher on level 1, and the audio
analog routing switcher on level 2, etc..

Looking at figure 1, VTR001 could have:

its SDI input connected to DVS-V*** routing switcher output 1,
and its AES/EBU audio input connected to DVS-A3232 routing switcher output 1,
and its analog audio input connected to analog audio routing switcher out 1.

4-6 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

Figure 2 shows that no two levels need to occupy the same size space in the X, and Y directions. As our
example in figure 1 demonstrates, level 1 could be 32 by 32 in 2 dimensional X, Y space, while levels 2,
and 3 are only 16 by 16.
Actually each level could occupy different size X, and Y space. Finally, it should be clear that Z “depth”,
is three in our case since we have 3 levels.

Levels Can occupy different size 2 dimensional space

Level 1

Level 2

X Level 3

Fig. 2

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 4-7

4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

Going back to the VTR 1 example, each of the 3 routing switcher outputs (SDI, AES/EBU, and analog
audio) could be assigned to a different level, under the VTR001 label.
Whenever destination VTR001 was selected all 3 crosspoints in the 3 different routing switchers would
switch together. This approach is often the simpler approach to implement, and understand, but it can
limit future flexibility in operation, as we will see.

Level Mapping

Level 1

Input (Sources)

Level 2

Level 3

Output
(Destinations)

Fig. 3

4-8 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

With this approach, you need the control terminal connected to the primary routing switcher, or a control
panel that allows access to individual “levels”, like the BKS-R1607, BKS-R1608, BKS-R3209 or BKS-
R3210 to control only one level of VTR001 routing.

Figure 4 shows this approach.

Level Approach

Inputs Outputs

SDI AES/EBU Analog SDI AES/EBU Analog

Routing Switcher Routing Switcher Routing Switcher Routing Switcher Routing Switcher Routing Switcher

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

VTR 1 VTR 1 VTR 1 VTR 1 VTR 1 VTR 1

VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2
VTR 3 VTR 3 VTR 3 VTR 3 VTR 3 VTR 3
VTR 4 VTR 4 VTR 4 VTR 4 VTR 4 VTR 4
VTR 5 VTR 5 VTR 5 VTR 5 VTR 5 VTR 5
VTR 6 VTR 6 VTR 6 VTR 6 VTR 6 VTR 6
VTR 7 VTR 7 VTR 7 VTR 7 VTR 7 VTR 7
VTR 8 VTR 8 VTR 8 VTR 8 VTR 8 VTR 8
Studio A DAT 1 Mixer 2 PGM Out Satellite 1 DAT 1 Satellite 1
News 1 DAT 2 News 1 Satellite 2 DAT 2 Satellite 2
Satellite 1 DAT 3 Satellite 1 Remote 1 DAT 3 Remote 1
Satellite 2 A/D #1 Satellite 2 Network 1 D/A #1 Network 1
Network 1 A/D #2 Network 1 News 1 D/A #2 News 1
Network 2 Mixer 1 PGM Network 2 News 2 Mixer 1 In 1 News 2
Remote 1 Mixer 1 Aux Remote 1 Char Gen 1 Mixer 1 In 2 A/D #1
Remote 2 SDI Demux Out Remote 2 Char Gen 2 SDI Mux In A/D #2
Camera 1 Cam Ret 1
Camera 2 Cam Ret 2
Camera 3 Cam Ret 3
Camera 4 Cam Ret 4
Still Store 1 Studio A Switch
Still Store 2 Studio A Switch
Char Gen 1 Studio A Mon
Char Gen 2 Studio A Mon
Frame Sync 1 Still Store 1
Frame Sync 2 Still Store 2
Studio B News 3
Patch Studio B Switch
Patch Studio B Switch
Patch Frame Sync 1
Patch Frame Sync 2
A/D #1 D/A #1

Fig. 4

The second approach is “virtual mapping”. There are sources that don’t logically follow one another,
looking at figure 4, you can see that News 1, and DAT 2 on the source side, Satellite 1, and DAT 1 on the
destination side are just 2 of many that wouldn’t normally be switched together. In this case the approach
shown in figure 5 could be used.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 4-9

4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

Virtual Approach

Inputs Outputs

Source Connector Destination Connector Physical Outputs

Physical Inputs Name Name

VTR 1 VTR 1
VTR 2 VTR 101 VTR 101 VTR 2
VTR 3 VTR 102 VTR 102 VTR 3
VTR 4 VTR 103 VTR 103 VTR 4
VTR 5 VTR 104 VTR 104 VTR 5
VTR 6 VTR 105 VTR 105 VTR 6
VTR 7 VTR 106 VTR 106 VTR 7
VTR 8 VTR 107 VTR 107 VTR 8
Studio A VTR 108 VTR 108 Satellite 1
News 1 STU 111 SAT 101 Satellite 2
Satelite 1 NEWS 101 SAT 102 Remote 1
Satelite 2 SAT 101 REM 001 Network 1
Network 1 SAT 102 NET 101 News 1
Network 2 NET 101 NEWS 101 News 2
SDI Remote 1 NET 102 NEWS 102 Char Gen 1 SDI
Routing Remote 2 REM 101 CG 001 Char Gen 2 Routing
Switcher Camera 1 REM 102 CG 002 Cam Ret 1 Switcher
Camera 2 CAM 001 CAM 001 Cam Ret 2
Camera 3 CAM 002 CAM 002 Cam Ret 3
Camera 4 CAM 003 CAM 003 Cam Ret 4
Still Store 1 CAM 004 CAM 004 Studio A Switch
Still Store 2 SS 001 STU 111 Studio A Switch
Char Gen 1 SS 002 STU 112 Studio A Mon
Char Gen 2 CG 001 MUN 111 Studio B Mon
Frame Sync 1 CG 002 MUN 121 Still Store 1
Frame Sync 2 FS 001 SS 001 Still Store 2
Studio B FS 002 SS 002 News 3
Patch STU 121 NEWS 103 Studio B Switch
Patch PTCH 001 STU 121 Studio B Switch
Patch PTCH 002 STU 122 Frame Sync 1
Patch PTCH 003 FS 001 Frame Sync 2
A/D #1 PTCH 004 FS 002 D/A #1
DIG 101 DIG 101
VTR 1 VTR 201 VTR 201 VTR 1
VTR 2 VTR 202 VTR 202 VTR 2
VTR 3 VTR 203 VTR 203 VTR 3
VTR 4 VTR 204 VTR 204 VTR 4
VTR 5 VTR 205 VTR 205 VTR 5
VTR 6 VTR 206 VTR 206 VTR 6
VTR 7 VTR 207 VTR 207 VTR 7
AES/EBU VTR 8 VTR 208 VTR 208 VTR 8 AES/EBU
Routing Routing
Switcher DAT 1 DAT 001 DAT 001 DAT 1 Switcher
DAT 2 DAT 002 DAT 002 DAT 2
DAT 3 DAT 003 DAT 003 DAT 3
A/D #1 DIG 201 DIG 201 D/A #1
A/D #2 DIG 202 DIG 202 D/A #2
Mixer 1 PGM MIX 201 MIX 201 Mixer 1 In 1
Mixer 1 Aux MIX 202 MIX 202 Mixer 1 In 2
SDI Demux Out DIG 203 DSP 203 SDI Mux In
VTR 301 VTR 301
VTR 1 VTR 302 VTR 302 VTR 1
VTR 2 VTR 303 VTR 303 VTR 2
VTR 3 VTR 304 VTR 304 VTR 3
VTR 4 VTR 305 VTR 305 VTR 4
VTR 5 VTR 306 VTR 306 VTR 5
VTR 6 VTR 307 VTR 307 VTR 6
VTR 7 VTR 308 VTR 308 VTR 7
Analog MIX 201 SAT 301 Analog
Routing VTR 8 VTR 8 Routing
Switcher Mixer 2 PGM Out NEWS 301 SAT 302 Satellite 1 Switcher
News 1 SAT 301 REM 301 Satellite 2
Satelite 1 SAT 302 NET 301 Remote 1
Satelite 2 NET 301 NEWS 301 Network 1
Network 1 NET 302 NEWS 302 News 1
Network 2 REM 301 DIG 301 News 2
Remote 1 REM 302 DIG 302 A/D #1
Remote 2 A/D #2
Fig. 5

A pure virtual mapping approach would keep all destinations on 1 virtual level (although physically there
is still 3 levels) as figure 5 shows.

4-10 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

Example : Destinations
. Satellite 1 connected to SDI routing switcher OUT 9
(SDI routing switcher given label destinations 001-032)
. DAT 1 connected to AES/EBU routing switcher OUT 9
(AES/EBU routing switcher given label destinations 033-048)
. Satellite 1 connected to Analog Audio OUT 9
(Analog audio routing switcher given label destinations 049-064)

Therefore :
SDI Satellite 1 (Sat001) ········· virtual level 1 out label 9
AES/EBU (DAT001) ······ virtual level 1 out label 41
Analog Audio Satellite 1 (Sat003) ········· virtual level 1 out label 57

If DAT001 destination is changed on a control panel only output label 41 (AES OUT 9) changes. Good
in situations where few signals logically follow from one level to the next (DAT’s and cameras, Mics and
CG’s, Audio Mixers and Still Stores, etc.). With this approach any sources/ destinations that should
follow across multiple routing switchers would require phantoms (covered later) to implement multiple
crosspoints switched.

A combination of virtual, and level mapping combines both approaches as shown in figure 6.

Level 1

Virtural and Level Mapping

Level 2

Level 3

Fig. 6

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 4-11

4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

With this approach sources, and destinations like the VTR’s would be level mapped together so that all 3
routing switchers switch at the same time under the VTR001, VTR002, etc. label.

But in the case of output 11, of each of the 3 routing switchers, the 1, and 3 levels (SDI, and analog audio
respectively) would be level mapped and switched together (REM001) while output 11 of level 2, which
is DAT003 would be virtually mapped off away from the other 2, so that it could be easily switched on
it’s own.

Example : Level 1, & level 3 outputs 11 are tied together under the REM001 label
Level 2, mapped out from under level 1 output 11 under the DAT003 label

If DAT003 destination is changed on a control panel only level 2 output 11 crosspoint on the AES/EBU
routing switcher changes. If REM001 destination is changed both levels 1, and 3 change. This approach
is good for a mixture of signals where routing levels follow in some instances, but not always.

n
Sources/Destinations where all associated crosspoints on all levels should follow would be mapped only
by levels. Sources/Destinations which shouldn’t follow would be mapped virtually.

Again, a pure level mapping approach is where all physical inputs 1, 2, etc are tied together on different
levels (see figure 4).

A pure level mapping approach is usually the worst approach. In our example here DAT 3, which is on
output 11 of the AES/EBU routing switcher appears as REM001 on all control, and display, panels if the
level only approach is taken.

Using the virtual/level mixture approach you will get separate video, and audio tallies (control panel push
button lit). As an example, (see figures 7, and 8) if you use the 2 entries from the virtual example above
and assign both of them to the same control panel (on different buttons), if REM001 is selected with it’s
button, the REM 1 button is tallied green. Now if DAT001 is selected with it’s button, the DAT 3 button
is tallied amber, while the REM001 button remains green. The DAT001 button will stay tallied when
other sources are selected as long as those sources are assigned to level 1, or 3, and not level 2.

When a button is selected with levels 1, and 2 active the DAT001 audio source button is turned off, as the
primary switches both levels of crosspoints.

Conversely, if REM 1 (green tally) is selected, and DAT 3 (amber tally) is selected, and another level 2
only source is selected, say DAT 2, the DAT 3 amber tally will extinguish, and the DAT 2 button will
now be tallied amber. The REM 1 green tally will remain on, unchanged.

A final note on figure 7.

This is a two dimensional drawing depicting a 3 dimensional object. Therefore the top half of the draw-
ing represents the X axis, the bottom half the Y axis, and from left to right the Z axis.

4-12 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 4-4. Basic Setup Procedures
VTR 1 VTR 1 VTR 1 VTR 001
VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 002
VTR 3 VTR 3 VTR 3 VTR 003
VTR 4 VTR 4 VTR 4 VTR 004
VTR 5 VTR 5 VTR 5 VTR 005
VTR 6 VTR 6 VTR 6 VTR 006
VTR 7 VTR 7 VTR 7 VTR 007
VTR 8 VTR 8 VTR 8 VTR 008
Studio A Mixer 2 PGM 0 STU 111
News 1 News 1 NEWS 001
Satellite 1 Satellite 1 SAT 001
Satellite 2 Satellite 2 SAT 002
Network 1 Network 1 NET 101
Network 2 Network 2 NET 102
Remote 1 Remote 1 REM 101
Remote 2 Remote 2 REM 102
Camera 1 CAM 001
Camera 2 CAM 002
Camera 3 Mixed Level/ CAM 003
Virtual Approach
Camera 4 CAM 004
Still Store 1 Level 3 SS 001
(Analog Audio)
Still Store 2 SS 002
Char Gen 1 CG 001
Char Gen 2 CG 002
Frame Sync 1 FS 001
Frame Sync 2 FS 002
Studio B STU 121
Patch Level 2 PTCH 001
(AES/EBU) Input/Sources
Patch PTCH 002
Patch PTCH 003
Patch PTCH 004
A/D #1 DIG 101
DAT 1 DAT 001
DAT 2 DAT 002
Level 1 (SDI) DAT 3 DAT 003
A/D #1 DIG 201
A/D #2 DIG 202
Mixer 1 PGM MIX 201
Mixer 1 Aux MIX 202
SDI Demux Out DIG 203

VTR 1 VTR 1 VTR 1 VTR 001

VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 2 VTR 002
VTR 3 VTR 3 VTR 3 VTR 003
VTR 4 VTR 4 VTR 4 VTR 004
VTR 5 VTR 5 VTR 5 VTR 005
VTR 6 VTR 6 VTR 6 VTR 006
VTR 7 VTR 7 VTR 7 VTR 007
VTR 8 VTR 8 VTR 8 VTR 008
Satellite 1 Satelite 1 SAT 001
Satellite 2 Satelite 2 SAT 002
Remote 1 Remote 1 REM 001
Network 1 Network 1 NET 001
News 1 News 1 NEWS 001
News 2 News 2 NEWS 002
Char Gen 1 CG 001
Char Gen 2 CG 002
Cam Ret 1 CAM 001
Cam Ret 2 CAM 002
Level 3
Cam Ret 3 (Analog Audio) CAM 003
Cam Ret 4 CAM 004
Studio A Switch STU 111
Studio A Switch STU 112
Studio A Mon MON 111
Studio B Mon MON 112
Still Store 1 SS 001
Still Store 2 Level 2 SS 002
(AES/EBU) Output/
News 3 Destinations NEWS103
Studio B Switch STU 121
Studio B Switch STU 122
Frame Sync 1 FS 001
Frame Sync 2 FS 002
D/A #1 DIG 101
DAT 1 DAT 001
DAT 2 DAT 002
Level 1 (SDI) DAT 3 DAT 003
D/A #1 DIG 201
D/A #2 DIG 202
Mixer 1 In 1 MIX 201
Mixer 1 In 2 MIX 202
SDI Mux In DIG 203
A/D #1 DIG 301
A/D #2 DIG 302
Fig. 7
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 4-13
4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

Now select suitable names for sources/destinations using Type name, and number and enter them in the
IN/OUT list of each routing switcher (menu item [C]).
Remember that you have to attention to the ins, and outs of routing switchers on all levels when you build
this list.

Example :
VIDEO ROUTER SOURCE

Connected to Connector Source Name

CAMERA-1 17 017=CAM001
CAMERA-2 18 018=CAM002
VTR-1 1 001=VTR001
VTR-2 2 002=VTR002

VIDEO ROUTER DESTINATION

Connected to Connector Destination Name

VTR-1 1 001=VTR001
VTR-2 2 002=VTR002
VTR-3 3 003=VTR003
VTR-4 4 004=VTR004

n
After destination (crosspoint/output) names have been set, the Protect mode may be implemented for that
destination (crosspoint can’t select another input).

After source (inputs) names have been set, the Secret mode may be implemented for the source (input not
selectable by control panels).

Both of these modes can be only be set, or disabled via the terminal.

4-14 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

3. Set Level Table (Menu Item [E])

This is the step where you assign what levels you want each name or label to be assigned to. You also
assign the names of the various levels (here SDI, AES, and AUD are used).
The information entered here was derived from figure 7.

1=SDI 2=AES 3=AUD 4=

001 VTR001 SDI AES AUD ....
002 VTR002 SDI AES AUD ....
003 VTR003 SDI AES AUD ....
004 VTR004 SDI AES AUD ....
005 VTR005 SDI AES AUD ....
006 VTR006 SDI AES AUD ....
007 VTR007 SDI AES AUD ....
008 VTR008 SDI AES AUD ....
009 SAT001 SDI .... AUD ....
010 SAT002 SDI .... AUD ....
011 REM001 SDI .... AUD ....
012 NET001 SDI .... AUD ....
013 NEWS001 SDI .... AUD ....
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
035 DIG203 .... AES .... ....
036 MIX201 .... AES .... ....
037 MIX202 .... AES .... ....
038 DIG203 .... AES .... ....
039 DIG301 .... .... AUD ....
040 DIG302 .... .... AUD ....

n
Delete levels not used so that these levels do not show on panels, or displays that use levels. The deleted
levels are displays as “ . . . .”.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 4-15

4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

4. Physical Assignment (Menu Item [L])

Now we actually associate the labels or names to a physical routing switcher input or output. Assign the
physical source/destination number and the physical level to the virtual source/destination name and the
virtual levels using the menu item [L : SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT].
Again refer to figure 7.

PHYSICAL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT DVS-V3232B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

SOURCE LEVEL
No. NAME VID AES AUD 4 5 6 7
001 VTR001 001-1 001-2 001-3 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
002 VTR002 002-1 002-2 002-3 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
003 VTR003 003-1 003-2 003-3 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
004 VTR004 004-1 004-2 004-3 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
005 VTR005 005-1 005-2 005-3 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
006 VTR006 006-1 006-2 006-3 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
007 VTR007 007-1 007-2 007-3 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
008 VTR008 008-1 008-2 008-3 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
009 STU111 009-1 ...-. 009-3 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
010 NEWS001 010-1 ...-. 010-3 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
011 SAT001 011-1 ...-. 011-3 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
: : : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : : :
017 CAM001 017-1 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
018 CAM002 018-1 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
: : : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : : :
033 DAT001 ...-. 009-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
034 DAT002 ...-. 010-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
035 DAT003 ...-. 011-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
036 DIG201 ...-. 012-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
037 DIG202 ...-. 013-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
038 MIX201 ...-. 014-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
039 MIX202 ...-. 015-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
040 DIG203 ...-. 016-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.

m
1. Create a similar table for the destination side (use F5 on the terminal setup menu [L] screen to toggle
between source/destination)
2. To delete an entry in menu item [L], press the [Ctrl] _ [P] .

This step can be confusing because you associate the input labels with physical routing switcher inputs,
along with output labels with physical outputs. You need to tell the primary which physical X row of
crosspoints feeding an output belong with each output name or label, along with which physical Y
column of crosspoints fed by an input belong with each input name or label. To visualize, look at figures
2, 3, or 4.

n
When BKPF-R70 is used as the primary station, all contents that have been set are cleared when
“A : /CLR-DATA/SBUS_LVG_DAT” which is supplied with BZR-10.
When number of items to set is smaller than number of items to clear, the procedure of clearing all items
once and setting all items from the very beginning is more efficient.

4-16 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

Additionally, an individual routing switcher can be divided in 2, or more virtual routing switchers. This
means that one level can be made to look like 2, or more levels. In our example our 3 level routing
switcher could have the AES/EBU routing switcher split into 2 virtual levels.
Our 3 routing switcher system would now have 4 levels.

Why would you want to do this? If you have an AES/EBU routing switcher that handles 2 AES/EBU
audio programs per digital signal, but your plant uses 4 channels, this means it takes 2 AES/EBU signals
for 4 channels. As before, there would be many times that you would want to switch these together, and
many times you would not. Also, in many cases you would have only one AES/EBU audio frame.
Therefore, AES/EBU Channels 1/2 would arrive at one input while AES/EBU Channels 3/4 would arrive
at another input of the same routing switcher. You could use phantoms (step 8) to link these inputs
together when desired, or you could create 2 distinct levels for one physical routing switcher frame using
menu item [L]. One level could be known as A1/2, and the second A3/4. Entries to do this might look
like the examples below.

PHYSICAL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT DVS-V3232B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

SOURCE LEVEL
No. NAME VID A12 A34 4 5 6 7
001 VTR001 001-1 001-2 016-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
002 VTR002 002-1 002-2 017-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
003 VTR003 003-1 003-2 018-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
004 VTR004 004-1 004-2 019-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
005 VTR005 005-1 005-2 020-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
006 VTR006 006-1 006-2 021-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
007 VTR007 007-1 007-2 022-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
008 VTR008 008-1 008-2 023-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.

PHYSICAL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT DVS-V3232B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

SOURCE LEVEL
No. NAME VID A12 A34 4 5 6 7
001 VTR001 001-1 001-2 002-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
002 VTR002 002-1 003-2 004-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
003 VTR003 003-1 005-2 006-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
004 VTR004 004-1 007-2 008-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
005 VTR005 005-1 009-2 010-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
006 VTR006 006-1 011-2 012-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
007 VTR007 007-1 013-2 014-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
008 VTR008 008-1 015-2 016-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.

This is a good place to point out that physical crosspoint usage does not have to
be in numerical order.

PHYSICAL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT DVS-V3232B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

SOURCE LEVEL
No. NAME VID A12 A34 4 5 6 7
001 VTR001 005-1 032-2 031-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
002 VTR002 006-1 030-2 029-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
003 VTR003 007-1 028-2 027-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
004 VTR004 008-1 026-2 025-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
005 VTR005 001-1 008-2 007-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
006 VTR006 002-1 006-2 005-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
007 VTR007 003-1 004-2 003-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.
008 VTR008 004-1 002-2 001-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. ...-.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 4-17

4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

5. Phantoms (Menu Item [H])

Now we will create any necessary phantoms. First we must define the phantom globally, and then allow
it’s usage by individual control panels. A phantom allows you to have a number of outputs select new
inputs all at once.

An instance of a global in our example would be the selection of input SAT001 (SDI level and the Analog
audio level) to output VTR001, and DIG201 (AES level) to output VTR001. We could call this phantom
SAT999. It’s entry as a global phantom would look like this

(1) In the top of menu item [H] we would assign our name to a numbered label:

0001 SAT999 0002 ...... 0003 ...... 0004 ......

0005 ...... 0006 ...... 0007 ...... 0007 ......

(2) Once the name is assigned we are in an edit menu, where we actually assign inputs to outputs:

1=SDI 2=AES 3=AUD

VTR001 < SAT001 1 .... 3
VTR001 < DIG201 .... 2 ....

Up to 4096 crosspoint changes can be stored among the Global phantoms.

For a control panel to be able to use a global phantom, that secondary station must be called (menu item
[R]), and the name of the global phantom loaded into it’s phantom table. Up to 57 crosspoint *1 changes
can be stored among each secondary stations (control panels) phantoms.

Local phantoms may be created in each control panel. Below is an example of a local phantom residing
in a control panels phantom table :

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3206 V3.11 STATION NUMBER 4

SET PHANTOM TABLE(PHANTOM:DESTINATION<SOURCE-LEVEL)(G.PAHNTOM NAME:NUMBER)
SAT999:0001 CAM999:CAM001<STU111 -1 CAM999:CAM002<STU111 -1
CAM999:CAM003<STU111 -1 CAM999:CAM004<STU111 -1 ......:......<...... -.
......:......<...... -. ......:......<...... -. ......:......<...... -.
......:......<...... -. ......:......<...... -. ......:......<...... -.

We can see here that our global phantom SAT999 is the first entree. The 0001 that trails SAT999 means
that this global phantom is the first entry in our global phantom table (menu item [H]). Next we can see
that locally (only at this control panel) we have defined a local phantom called CAM999. It selects the
Studio A (STU111) input, and sends it to our 4 camera return outputs (CAM001, etc.) whenever it is
selected. The “_1” means that level 1 (SDI) is switched.

SAT999, and CAM999 could be assigned to buttons on this control panel just like any other source, or
destination name could be.

*1 : Up to 64 crosspoint changes can be stored in BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210 of Ver. 1.10.

4-18 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

6. Decide Remote Control Units Can Be Active on the S-BUS

(1) Available Stations (Menu Item [F])

Make secondary stations available by setting “E” on the menu item [F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER.
The stations that are enabled will be polled by the primary, for panel activity, and status updates.

ENABLE ACTIVE UNIT FOR STATION NUMBER DVS-V3232B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
001-020 M E E E E E E E
021-040

n
Before this setting each secondary station has to have its ID set using the dip-switch on the back of the
control panel. The primary station has ID=1, secondary stations should have ID=2 or later.
For your reference, ID-00 is the test number, and ID-255 is the global number. Be noted that both of
them cannot be used.

(2) Detection of Stations (Menu Item [Z])

If you set “?” to a ID location in the menu item [Z], the primary station will display the corresponding
model code of that location and display a warning if communication is interrupted.

SET UNIT DETECTABLE DVS-V3232B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
001-020 M 03 ? 15 04 ? ? ?
021-040

01:DVS-V1616 02:DVS-V3232 03:DVS-A3232 04:BKS-R1601 05:BKS-R3202
06:BKS-R3203 07:BKS-R3281 08:DVS-V6464 09:BKS-R5000 10:DVS-RS1616
11:DVS-TC3232 12:BKDM-5080 13:BKS-R3204 14:BKS-R3205 15:BKS-R3206
16:BKS-R3280 17:BZR-1000 18:DVS-V3232B 19:DVS-V6464B 20:BKDS-7700

m
1. This menu is used with BZR-10 to select the secondary stations for saving the data. BZR-10 uploads
the data of the secondary stations only selected with the “?” mark.
2. BZR-1000 software can not be used when “?” mark is set on in this menu on secondary stations using
this menu. Continuous “System Event Has Occurred” error messages will be displayed in the BZR-
1000 GUI if “?” is set for any secondary stations.
3. Once a “?” is entered you must exit, and re-enter this menu to see the communications result.
The model code is displayed in “?”.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 4-19

4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

7. Inhibit Crosspoint Table (Menu Item [M])

Set invalid crosspoint table for the specified crosspoints that will not be allowed to be selected by various
outputs INHIBIT TABLE on the primary station.
On the table “X” means valid crosspoint, and “_” means invalid crosspoint.

SET INHIBIT TABLE DVS-V3232B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

DEST. SOURCE
001 01--08 09--16 17--24 25--32 33--40 41--48 49--56
VTR001 -X-XXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
VTR002 XXX-XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
VTR003 XXXX-XXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
VTR004 XXXXX-XX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX

Be careful that destination cannot select a source which makes up a loop in which the destination be-
comes the signal generating source in order to avoid potential operational mistake.
In the example here the output VTR001 can not select input 1 (VTR001), etc.

8. Tie Line Management (Menu Items [N] & [O])

This comes into play mainly if you have different types of serial digital data. Such as having both 4fsc,
and 4:2:2 signal streams in the same routing switcher level. By using the menu item [R : CALL SEC-
ONDARY STATION] you can have the primary call itself, and configure the primary to handle either
standard in groups of 8 inputs, and outputs. The same can be done be calling secondary stations on the
same level.

If you have both types of signal you probably need to convert from one standard to the other often. To
prevent the need to have many converters, you can set up the system recursively re-route serial data of
one type back into the routing switcher with a limited number of converters between routing switcher out
and routing switcher in. (See figure 8.)

4:2:2 Inputs

4fsc Inputs

4:2:2 Outputs

4:2:2 to 4fsc
4:2:2 Outputs
Converter
SDI Router
with both
4:2:2 & 4fsc 4fsc to 4:2:2
4fsc Outputs
Converter

4fsc Outputs

Fig. 8

4-20 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

Instead of one large routing switcher, there are often 2 separate routing switchers. One handling 4:2:2,
and the other 4fsc. The output of the 4:2:2 would cascade through the 4:2:2 to 4fsc converters, and on to
the inputs of the 4fsc routing switcher. The opposite configuration would be set up for going from 4fsc to
4:2:2.

What is done here is that groups of inputs are combined in a Source Name group, along with groups of
outputs known as Destination Name groups. Net (Path) Groups are then created, each one being a list of
routing switcher outs to routing switcher in’s to be used.
When a input in a source group is selected, or an output in a destination group, the routing switcher looks
at successive paths (their order as entered in each path group) until it finds an unused one.

n
Each Source, Destination, and Net group can have up to 4 entries in it.
There can be a total of 20 Source, and 20 Destination groups.
There can be up to 40 Net groups.

Each Source and Destination group are tied together by 1 Net group.
Up to 3 routing switchers, or 2 recursive paths into 1 routing switcher can be supported.

Source Group Net Group Destination Group

S001:IN003 N001:OUT003-IN041 D001:OUT033
:IN004 :OUT004-IN042 :OUT034
:IN005 :OUT005-IN043 :OUT035
:IN006 :OUT006-IN044 :OUT036

S002:IN010 N002:OUT023-IN051 D002:OUT056
:IN015 :OUT024-IN052 :OUT057
:IN023 :OUT025-IN053 :OUT058
:IN027 :OUT026-IN054 :OUT059

PATHS
1:S001-N001-D001
2:S002-N002-D001

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 4-21

4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

9. Description Name (Menu Item [J])

In addition to Type + Number names, letter names (16 letters can be displayed on the BKS-R3281, most
through only display 7) can be used.
This is called a “Description name”.

To set to Description names mode, select DESCRIP.NAME using the menu item [J : NAME STYLE].
Everytime [J] is selected in the System Setup Menu the name mode toggles between Type + Number, and
Description name modes.

After [J] has been selected for the first time, go back to menu items [C] and [D] and enter the descriptive
names, if desired.

SOURCE NUMBER TRANSCODE DVS-V3232B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

001=VTR001 ProgVTR 002=VTR002 SpotVTR
003=VTR003 BkupVTR 004=VTR004 Net-Dly
: : : :
017=CAM001 Pete 018=CAM002 Mary
019=CAM003 Tom 019=CAM004 John

n
The description name can be used repeatedly for the sources and destinations.

4-22 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 4-4. Basic Setup Procedures

10. Control Panel Setup (Menu Item [R])

Each individual control panel is contacted, and programmed by selecting [R] in the setup menu, and then
by entering the S-BUS address of the desired panel. If the control panels are enabled in the menu item [Z
: SET UNIT DETECTABLE], this might help you identify the panels address in question. If the address
for the desired panel needs further search select the menu item [X : DISPLAY S-BUS COMMUNICA-
TIONS], and command a crosspoint change from the panel in question, and observe the address indicated
by the S-BUS activity.

Once the menu page of the control panel is displayed select the menu item [Z : SET PANEL STATUS].
From this sub-menu you can configure which buttons on the panel are inputs or output selects. Also
whether this panel operates alone or in conjunction with other panels are determined in this menu.

Next select the menu item [N : SET PANEL TABLE]. Using this sub-menu you assign input/output
labels, or phantoms to the appropriate switches. (This setting is not necessary in the case of X-Y control.)

If the panel being programmed is a BKS-R3202, or a BKS-R3206 select the menu item [O : SET AVAIL-
ABLE DESTINATION]. On BKS-R3202 and BKS-R3206 all sources and destinations can be selected.
To limit potential operational mistakes destinations which may be controlled can be filtered.
In BKS-R3210 and BKS-R1607, a setting which limits arbitrary selection of sources is possible using
[Ctrl] _ [F].

When there are several control panels with similar, or identical setups you can use the menu item [L :
COPY TABLE DATA] to copy setup data from one control panel to another.

n
Use menu item [L : COPY TABLE DATA] from the panel you will copy data to!

Once you have copied the setup to a new panel you can edit that panels settings through the sub-menus as
before.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 4-23

4-5. Flowchart of Setup

4-5. Flowchart of Setup

Initial Setting Modification
Primary Station Setting

DVS-V3232/FV6464B : Set S3 to "D" (Default) position on the CPU-149 board, then return
S3 to "0" position.
HDS-V3232 : Set S2 to "D" (Default) position on the CPU-251 board, then return
S2 to "0" position.

K: RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE

U: SELECT CONTROL MODE

P: CHANGE PASSWORD

T: SET CLOCK

V: SELECT WARNING DISPLAY

B: SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE

J: NAME STYLE

C: SET DESTINATION NAME

D: SET SOURCE NAME

E: SET LEVEL TABLE

F: SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER

L: SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT

H: SET GLOBAL PHANTOM

M: SET INHIBIT TABLE

When Description Name When ' Type + Num ' Name

N: SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP

O: SET TIE LINES

R: CALL SECONDARY STATION

Secondary Station Setting (Switcher) Secondary Station Setting (Remote Control Unit)
K: RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE L: COPY TABLE DATA

U:SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL Z: SET PANEL STATUS

A: SET UNIT LOCATION N: SET PANEL TABLE

G: UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER O: SET AVAILABLE DESTINATION

M: SET MONITOR FUNCTION H: SET PHANTOM TABLE

End

4-24 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 4-6. Setting Up BKPF-300/301/350/351

4-6. Setting Up BKPF-300/301/350/351

1. Set the switch S1-3 on BKPF-300/301/350/351 to “OFF (TERMINAL)” position.

2. Select the menu item [R: CALL SECONDARY STATION] from the menu screen of primary station,
and call BKPF-300/301/350/351.
The following screen appears.

Model name Software version indication

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKPF-300 VX.XX STATION NUMBER XXX Station address value

SOURCE No: 0001 - 0008 DESTINASTION No: 0001 LEVEL No: 1
1
3
SWITCHING FIELD: ASYNC SDI FORMAT: 4:2:2 2

4 5







Ctrl-D : RETURN Ctrl-E : RETURN TO MENU

(Example of BKPF-300)

1 SOURCE LOCATION of equipment. Input range is set here.

2 DESTINATION LOCATION of equipment. Output range is set here.
3 LEVEL of equipment is set here.
4 The MATRIX switching timing is set here. (Select either ASYNC or FIELD.)
5 The SDI format is set here. (Available in BKPF-300 only.)
(Select a type from three formats of 4: 2: 2, 4fsc NTSC or 4fsc PAL.)

3. Set the above described items from 1 to 5.

(1) Set the items from 1 to 3 as follows. Select an area to modify using the cursor key. Enter any
desired value using the numeric keys on the control terminal.
(2) Set the items 4 and 5 as follows. Select an area to modify using the cursor key, and press
[Enter].
Every pressing of [Enter] increments the preset values in order.

4. Press [Ctrl] _ [D] to return to the menu screen of primary station from the setting screen.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 4-25

 Section 5
System Settings

5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

A : DISPLAY CONTROL AREA

A : DISPLAY UNIT LOCATION

Purpose
The menu items [A : DISPLAY CONTROL AREA] and
[A : DISPLAY UNIT LOCATION] are used to check the
source and destination area of the whole routing system to
be controlled by the primary station.

Checking Procedure
1. Select menu item [A].
2. Control area is displayed as shown below.
Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to return to the menu screen.

DISPLAY CONTROL AREA DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

SOURCE No 0001-0512 DESTINATION No 0001-0512


Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

The following table lists the control area and setting area
for each model.

Model Control Area Mapping Area

Input control Output control Setting area

area area

DVS-RS1616 1 to 512 1 to 512 1 to 128

DVS-TC3232 1 to 512 1 to 512 1 to 256
BVS-V3232
BVS-A3232
DVS-V1616 1 to 512 1 to 512 1 to 512
DVS-V3232B
DVS-V6464B
DVS-A3232
BKPF-R70
HDS-V3232

n
The control area of the menu item [A] means the control
area of the whole routing system, and not the input/output
area of the primary station.
To set the source/destination location of the primary
station, call the secondary station menu screen by selecting
menu item [R] and type the station number [1], and then
select the menu item [A] of the secondary station.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-1

5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE C : SET DESTINATION NAME

Purpose Purpose
This menu is used to set the type name of the source This menu is used to set the destination name and protect
destination and global phantom table. function of each output.
The menu makes the management of source/destination A number between 001 to 999 and a type name set at the
easier. menu item [B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE] can be set to
each destination. Description name can be set by chang-
Setting Procedure ing the name mode at the menu item [J : NAME STYLE].
1. Select menu item [B]. For details of setting the name, refer to [J] in the menu.
2. Use the cursor or alphabet/numerical keys and select The protect function (to protect the output signal from
the codes for the type name to be registered from the being controlled from the remote control unit) prevents the
sixteen character codes (0 to 9 and A to F) displayed source signal selected for the specified destination from
on the screen. being switched by other remote control units.
3. When [Ctrl] _ [P] is pressed, the setting of the type (During recording and ON AIR, interrupting operations
name will be canceled, and “ · · · · ” will be displayed. can be prevented.)
4. When [Enter] is pressed, the type name can be set. If
[Enter] is pressed again before entering the type Setting Procedure (Destination Name)
name, the registration will be deleted and the cursor 1. Select menu item [C].
moves to the next position. 2. Press the cursor keys or the function keys to select the
5. Use the alphabet and numerical keys to enter the type destination number.
name (within four letters). 3. When [Ctrl] _ [P] is pressed, the set destination name
6. When [Enter] is pressed, the type name will be set will be deleted and “ · · · · ” will be displayed.
and the cursor moves to the next position. 4. When [Enter] is pressed, the destination name can be
If [Ctrl] _ [F] is pressed before the setting, the typed.
original type name will be returned. If [Enter] is pressed again before entering a name, the
7. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen will be registration will be deleted and the cursor moves to the
displayed. next position.
5. Select the code assigned to each type name, and use
SOURCE/DEST/PHANTOM TYPE DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1 the numerical keys to enter the destination name.

0=VTR 1=VCR 2=AUX 3=FLM 4=TEST 5=STU 6=CAM 7=REM
6. When [Enter] is pressed, the destination name will be
8=CG 9=NETA A=ENG B=ED C=FS D=SS E=BARS F=PHAN set and the cursor moves to the next position.

Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU If [Ctrl] _ [F] is pressed before the setting, the

original destination name will be returned.
Example of Setting Screen 7. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen will be
displayed.

5-2 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

n Operating Function Keys

1. The same destination name cannot be registered at [F1] : SEARCH (To move the cursor to the desired
more than two destinations. If this is done, an error destination name)
message will be displayed at the bottom of the screen. 1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input DEST.
Example: “VTR001 is used already; Ignored” NAME =” will be displayed.
destination name 2. Input the destination name to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
2. When the Description name mode is selected at menu to the desired destination name.
item [J], both Description name and “Type + number”
name will be displayed. n
In this menu, Description name is used for setting. When menu item [J] is set to the Description name
mode, [F1] (SEARCH) will have the following
Setting Procedure (Protect Function) functions.
1. Select the destination name using the cursor, and then 1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input NAME
press [P]. “P” is displayed after the selected destina- =”will be displayed.
tion name and the protect function is set. 2. Enter the Description name (within seven
Protect function cannot be set for a number whose characters) from the head.
destination name has not been assigned. 3. When [Enter] is pressed, the Description name
2. To release the protect function, select the destination entered will be searched.
name and press [P] once again. 4. If the desired name does not exist in the screen,
press [F1] again.
m
1. If a destination name is reversed, it means the protect [F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the destination
function is set with a control terminal and not with a number)
remote control unit. 1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
2. To change the protected destination name, release the NUMBER =” will be displayed.
protection first before beginning the modification 2. Input the destination number to be retrieved.
process. 3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired number.
DESTINATION NUMBER TRANSCODE DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

001=VTR001 P 002=VTR002 003=VTR003 P 004=VTR004 [F3] : Pg Up
005=VTR005 006=VTR006 007=VTR007 008=VTR008
009=VCR101 010=VCR102 011=VCR103 012=VCR104 When [F3] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
013=NETA001 014=NETA002 015=NETA003 016=NETA004
017=....... 018=....... 019=....... 020=....... lines previous to the 16 lines displayed currently.
021=.......
025=.......
022=.......
026=.......
023=.......
027=.......
024=.......
028=.......


[F4] : Pg Dn
029=....... 030=....... 031=....... 032=....... When [F4] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
033=....... 034=....... 035=....... 036=.......
lines next to the 16 lines displayed currently.
0=VTR 1=VCR 2=AUX 3=FLM 4=TEST 5=STU 6=CAM 7=REM
8=CG 9=NETA A=ENG B=ED C=FS D=SS
E=BARS F=PHAN

F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn P:PROT. Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Example of Setting Screen

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-3

5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

D : SET SOURCE NAME

Purpose Setting Procedure (Secret Function)

This menu is used to set the source name and secret 1. Select the source name using the cursor, and press [S].
function (inhibition of source selection with a remote “S” is displayed after the source name, and the secret
control unit). is set. Secret cannot be set for a number whose source
A number between 001 to 999 and a type name set at the name has not been assigned.
menu item [B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE] can be set to 2. To release the secret function, select the source name
each source name. Description name can be set by and press [S] once again.
changing the name mode at menu item [J : NAME When the password is required, input the password
STYLE] in the menu. For details of setting the name, and press [Enter]. The secret will be released.
refer to [J] in the menu.
n
The secret function is necessary when a source signal For details on password settings, refer to the menu item [P
should not be taken. When secret is set, remote control : CHANGE PASSWORD].
units cannot select the source signal.
SOURCE NUMBER TRANSCODE DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

Setting Procedure (Source Name) 001=VTR001 002=VTR002 003=VTR003 004=VTR004
005=VTR005 006=VTR006 007=VCR101 008=VCR102 S
1. Select menu item [D]. 009=AUX001 S 010=AUX002 011=CAM001 S 012=CAM002
013=CG001 014=NETA001 015=SS001 016=BARS001
2. Press the cursor keys or the function keys, to select the 017=....... 018=....... 019=....... 020=.......
source number. 021=....... 022=....... 023=....... 024=.......
025=....... 026=....... 027=....... 028=.......
3. When [Ctrl] _ [P] is pressed, the source name will be 029=....... 030=....... 031=....... 032=.......
033=....... 034=....... 035=....... 036=.......
deleted.
4. When [Enter] is pressed, the source name can be 0=VTR 1=VCR 2=AUX 3=FLM 4=TEST 5=STU 6=CAM 7=REM
8=CG 9=NETA A=ENG B=ED C=FS D=SS E=BARS F=PHAN
typed. If [Enter] is pressed before entering a name,
F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn S:SECRET Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
the registration will be deleted and the cursor moves to
the next position.
Example of Setting Screen
5. Select the code assigned to each type name, and use
the numerical keys to enter the source name.
6. When [Enter] is pressed, the source name will be set
and the cursor moves to the next position.
If [Ctrl] _ [F] is pressed before the setting, the
original source name will be returned.
7. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen will be
displayed.

n
1. The same name cannot be given to assigned to two or
more sources. If this is done, an error message will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Example: “VTR001 is used already; Ignored”
source name

2. When the Description name is selected at menu item

[J], the screen will display the Description name in
addition to the “Type + Number” name.
In this menu, the Description name is used for settings.

5-4 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

Operating Function Keys

[F1] : SEARCH (To move the cursor to the desired source
name)
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input SOURCE
NAME =” will be displayed.
2. Input the source name to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired source name.

n
When menu item [J] is set to the Description name
mode, [F1] (SEARCH) will have the following
functions.
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input * * * *
NAME =” will be displayed.
2. Enter the Description name (within seven
characters) from the head.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the Description name
entered will be searched.
4. If the desired name does not exist in the screen,
press [F1] again.

[F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the source number)

1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input SOURCE
NUMBER=” will be displayed.
2. Input the source number to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired number.

[F3] : Pg Up
When [F3] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
lines previous to the 16 lines displayed currently.
[F4] : Pg Dn
When [F4] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
lines next to the 16 lines displayed currently.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-5

5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

E : SET LEVEL TABLE

Purpose Operating Function Keys

This menu is used to assign the level name and the level to [F1] : SEARCH (To move the cursor to the desired
each destination name. Up to eight levels can be set. destination name)
In this menu, set only the necessary levels. If levels which 1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
have not actually been used are set, the response of the NAME =” will be displayed.
routing switcher system will become slower. Delete all
2. Input the destination name to be retrieved.
levels not needed.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
After setting this menu item, the selected levels can be
checked by remote control unit. to the desired destination name.

Setting Procedure (Setting of Level Names) n

1. Select menu item [E]. When menu item [J] is set to the Description name
2. Press the cursor keys or the function keys to select the mode, [F1] (SEARCH) will have the following
level number 1 to 8. functions.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the level name can be 1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input NAME =”
assigned. will be displayed.
4. Enter the level name using the alphabet and numerical 2. Enter the Description name (within seven
keys (within four characters). characters) from the head.
5. When [Enter] is pressed, the level name will be set. 3. When [Enter] is pressed, the Description name
If [Ctrl] _ [F] is pressed before the setting, the
entered will be searched.
original level name will be returned.
4. If the desired name does not exist in the screen,
6. When [Ctrl] _ [Z] is pressed, the level 1 to 8 will be
press [F1] again.
assigned to all destination names.
7. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen will be
returned. [F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the number of the
desired destination)
Setting Procedure (Level Setting . Release) 1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
1. Select menu item [E]. NUMBER =”, will be displayed.
2. Use the cursor keys to select the destination level. 2. Input the destination number to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the level name will be 3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
deleted and displayed as “ · · · · ” and the level setting to the desired destination number.
will be released.
4. You can search the level with the function keys. n
If the destination name is not set, the number of the
LEVEL TABLE DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
destination will not be displayed.
1=VID 2=A1 3=A2 4=4 5=5 6=6 7=7 8=8

No. out VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 8
001 OUT001 VID A1 A2 4 .... .... .... ....
002 OUT002 VID A1 A2 4 .... .... .... ....
003 OUT003 VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 8
004 OUT004 VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 8
005 OUT005 VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 8
006 OUT006 VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 8
007 OUT007 VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 8
008 OUT008 VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 8
009 OUT009 VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 8
010 OUT010 VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 8
011 OUT011 VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 8
012 OUT012 VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 8
013 OUT013 VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 8
014 OUT014 VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 8
015 OUT015 VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 8

0=IN 1=OUT 2=.... 3=.... 4=.... 5=.... 6=.... 7=....
8=.... 9=.... A=.... B=.... C=.... D=....
E=.... F=....

F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Example of Setting Screen

5-6 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER G: UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER

Purpose Purpose
This menu is used to enable the units connected to the S- This menu is used to copy the table data stored in the main
BUS data link to communicate. CPU board of the primary station to the backup CPU
board.
Setting Procedure This setting is valid only when the backup CPU board is
1. Select menu item [F]. installed in the primary station.
2. Press the cursor keys to select the secondary station
whose communication will be valid. Setting Procedure
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the setting displayed will 1. Select menu item [G]. The message “This process
change (“E” → blank → “E”). Only the secondary requires about n minutes. Execute? (y/n)” will be
stations displayed with “E” are valid. (“M” indicates displayed at the bottom of the screen.
the primary station.) Ver. 2.00 : n=5
4. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen will be Ver. 1.00 : n=7
displayed. 2. Table data copying is performed when [Y] is pressed.
To cancel copying, press [N].
n 3. After copying, “PROGRAM TABLE? (y/n)” may be
As the response will become slower if there are many displayed at the bottom of the screen. In this case,
secondary stations, make the secondary stations not press [Y].
connected invalid.
“*” indicates out of the control area. m
1. The ROM version of the main CPU board and that of
ENABLE ACTIVE UNIT FOR STATION NUMBER DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1 the backup CPU board must be the same. If different

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112131415 1617181920 versions are used, the unit may hang up due to copy-
+
001-020 M E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E
ing. Remove the backup CPU board when this occurs.
021-040 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E The above occurs because a new table data can not be
041-060 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E
061-080 E E E E E run on the old version software.
081-100
101-120
2. It takes about seven minutes to copy the table data.
121-140 The copy makes other operations slow.
141-160
161-180 3. The table data of transcode from RS-422A to S-BUS
181-200
201-220
(set at the menu item [U] of a secondary station) is not
221-240 copied to the backup CPU board.
241-254 * * * * * *
4. When you copy the data of main CPU to backup CPU
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
on the menu screen [G : UPDATE BACKUP CON-
Example of Setting Screen TROLLER] of the primary station or a secondary
station, you can abort the operation by pressing [Ctrl]
m _ [D].
1. Station ID of the primary station is always regardless However you should copy again for the data of the
of the DIP switch setting on the CPU board. backup CPU is not correct if aborted. Even if you do
2. Station ID of the secondary station is deter mined with not copy again, the data will be renewed in one hour
the DIP switch setting. Do not assign the same approximately by the auto backup function.
number on two or more units as station ID on both
standard S-BUS and monitor S-BUS.
Number that can be registered as secondary station ID
are 2 to 254.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-7

5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

H : SET GLOBAL PHANTOM

The phantom function switches several crosspoints Operating Function Keys

together with one button pushing of a remote control unit. (Global Phantom Display)
The crosspoints of different levels can be also switched [F1] : SEARCH (To move the cursor to the desired global
with this function. phantom name)
There are two kinds of phantoms such as local phantom 1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input PHAN-
and global phantom (refer to the menu item [H : SET TOM NAME =” will be displayed.
PHANTOM TABLE] of secondary stations for local 2. Input the global phantom name to be retrieved.
phantom). 3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
In local phantom function, the phantom data is stored in a to the desired name.
remote control unit, and the phantom name is assigned
only on this remote control unit. In global phantom [F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the desired global
function, however, the phantom data is stored in the phantom number)
primary station, and it can be called by any remote control 1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input PHAN-
unit. The global phantom function can be set only when TOM NAME =” will be displayed.
DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-V3232 is 2. Input the global phantom to be retrieved.
assigned as the primary station. 3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
The following describes how to set the global phantom to the desired number.
data in the primary station. A maximum of 4095 cross-
points can be registered. [F3] : Pg Up
When [F3] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
Setting Procedure lines previous to the 16 lines displayed currently.
1. Select menu item [H]. The global phantom list will be [F4] : Pg Dn
displayed. When [F4] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
2. Select any global phantom number with the cursor or lines next to the 16 lines displayed currently.
function key and press [Enter]. The edit screen will
be displayed.
When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen will be
displayed.

GLOBAL PHANTOM LIST DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

(4094 REMAIN)
No. NAME No. NAME No. NAME No. NAME

0001 GPHA001 0002 ....... 0003 ....... 0004 .......
0005 ....... 0006 ....... 0007 ....... 0008 .......
0009 ....... 0010 ....... 0011 ....... 0012 .......
0013 ....... 0014 ....... 0015 ....... 0016 .......
0017 ....... 0018 ....... 0019 ....... 0020 .......
0021 ....... 0022 ....... 0023 ....... 0024 .......
0025 ....... 0026 ....... 0027 ....... 0028 .......
0029 ....... 0030 ....... 0031 ....... 0032 .......
0033 ....... 0034 ....... 0035 ....... 0036 .......
0037 ....... 0038 ....... 0039 ....... 0040 .......
0041 ....... 0042 ....... 0043 ....... 0044 .......
0045 ....... 0046 ....... 0047 ....... 0048 .......
0049 ....... 0050 ....... 0051 ....... 0052 .......
0053 ....... 0054 ....... 0055 ....... 0056 .......
0057 ....... 0058 ....... 0059 ....... 0060 .......
0061 ....... 0062 ....... 0063 ....... 0064 .......

0=IN 1=OUT 2=.... 3=.... 4=.... 5=.... 6=.... 7=....
8=.... 9=.... A=.... B=.... C=.... D=.... E=.... F=GPHA

F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Example of Global Phantom Screen

5-8 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

3. As the cursor is placed where the name is typed, press Operating Function Keys
[Enter]. The input mode will be set. (Global Phantom Edit Display)
4. Select the codes assigned to each type name and enter [F1] : SEARCH (To move the cursor to any source name
any number using the cursor. Press [Enter] key to set or destination name)
it. Press [Ctrl] _ [P] to delete the phantom name.
5. Move the cursor to the place to input the destination n
and press [Enter]. The input mode will be set. When menu item [J] is set to the Description name
6. Input the destination name with the alphabet or mode, [F1] (SEARCH) will have the following
numerical keys and press [Enter] to set it. functions.
7. Input the source name in the same way as 1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input NAME =”
setting the destination name and press [Enter]. will be displayed.
8. Set the crosspoint level. Move the cursor to 2. Enter the Description name (within seven
desired level and press [Enter]. The setting will be characters) from the head.
changed. 3. When [Enter] is pressed, the Description name
Press [Ctrl] _ [E]. The menu will return. entered will be searched.
4. If the desired name does not exist in the screen,
EDIT GLOBAL PHANTOM

DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
(4094 REMAIN)
press [F1] again.
0001 GPHA001

[F2] : ADD (To add the row of crosspoints to be regis-

LEVEL: 1=VID 2=A1 3=A2 4=4 5=5 6=6 7=7 8=8
OUT001 <IN001 VID .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
OUT002 <IN002 VID A1 .... .... .... .... .... ....
OUT003 <IN001 VID A1 A2 .... .... .... .... ....
tered as the global phantom)
OUT004 <IN001 VID A1 A2 4 .... .... .... ....

[F3] : DELETE (To delete the crosspoints)

OUT005 <IN001 VID A1 A2 4 5 .... .... ....
OUT006 <IN001 VID A1 A2 4 5 6 .... ....
OUT007 <IN001 VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 ....
OUT008 <IN001 VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 8
1. Select the destination name to be deleted using
OUT009 <IN001 VID .... .... .... .... .... .... .... the cursor.
OUT010 <IN001 VID .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
OUT011 <IN001 VID .... .... .... .... .... .... .... 2. Press [F3].
OUT012 <IN001 VID .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
OUT013 <IN001 VID .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
OUT014 <IN001 VID .... .... .... .... .... .... .... [F4] : Dstlvl (To change the level of the crosspoint at the
OUT015 <IN001 VID .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
OUT016 <IN001 VID A1 .... 4 5 .... 7 8 cursor to the level set at the menu item [E])

0=IN 1=OUT 2=.... 3=.... 4=.... 5=.... 6=.... 7=.... 1. Select the destination name to be returned to the
8=.... 9=.... A=.... B=.... C=.... D=....
E=.... F= GPHA initial level using the cursor.

F1:SEARCH F2:ADD F3:DELETE F4:DstLvl Ctrl-E:RETURN TO LAST MENU 2. Press [F4].

Example of Global Phantom Edit Screen n

When the name mode of menu item [J] is switched, the
destination and source names displayed on the global
phantom edit screen will change.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-9

5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

J : NAME STYLE

Purpose Operating Function Keys

This menu is used to switch the name styles of the destina- [F1] : SEARCH (To move the cursor to the desired
tion and source. destination name)
The “Type + Number” name (Type + Num) or “Descrip- 1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
tion” name (DESCRIP. NAME) can be set. NAME =” will be displayed.
Names on the setting screen of menu items [C], [D], [E], 2. Input the destination name to be retrieved.
[H], [L], [M], [N], [O], and [Q] are switched according to 3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
this menu. to the desired destination name.

Setting Procedure [F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the desired destina-
1. Select menu item [J]. tion number)
2. Press the alphabet key [J] and [Enter]. The message 1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
on the screen will change from “Type + Num” to NAME =” will be displayed.
“DESCRIP. NAME” each time this key are pressed. 2. Input the destination number to be retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
. Destination name setting procedure using the to the desired number.
Description name
3. Set menu item [J] to the Description name mode. [F3] : Pg Up
Ex. [J : NAME STYLE (DESCRIP. NAME)] When [F3] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
4. Select menu item [C]. lines previous to the 16 lines displayed currently.
5. Move the cursor to the desired destination number. [F4] : Pg Dn
6. When either [Enter] is pressed, the destination name When [F4] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
can be typed. If the Description name is set already, lines next to the 16 lines displayed currently.
delete it by [BS].
7. Enter the Description name using the alphabet keys or [F5] : PASTE (To copy the Description name)
the numerical keys. When [Enter] is pressed, the 1. Move the cursor to the destination number to be
Description name will be set. copied.
n 2. Press [SPACE].
Up to sixteen characters can be input. Remote control 3. Move the cursor to the destination number to be
units except BKS-R3281 will display until the seven pasted, and press [F5].
characters. As the first seven characters are also used to n
distinguish the names, the unit may not operate properly if Do not assign the same name to more than one destination.
the same names are assigned for the first seven characters.
. Source name setting procedure using
DESTINATION NUMBER TRANSCODE DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1 Description name

1.....7......... 1.....7......... 3. Set menu item [J] to the Description name mode.
001=OUT001 P DST-012 | 002=OUT002 Hong Kong |
003=OUT003 London | 004=OUT004 P Market | Example:[J : NAME STYLE (DESCRIP. NAME)]
005=OUT005 New York | 006=OUT006 P Tokyo |
007=OUT007 Toront | 008=OUT008 OUT008 |
4. Select menu item [D].
009=OUT009 | 010=OUT010 P Net-1 | 5. Move the cursor to the desired source name.
6. When [Enter] is pressed, the Description name can be
011=OUT011 Net-2 | 012=OUT012 EDIT-2 |
013=OUT013 EDIT-5 | 014=OUT014 CG-A |
015=OUT015 CG-B | 016=OUT016 News-1 |
017=OUT017 P OUT017 | 018=OUT018 Mountain |
typed. If the Description name is set already, delete it
019=OUT019 Washington D.C. | 020=OUT020 OUT020 | by [BS].
021=OUT021 OUT021 | 022=OUT022
|
023=OUT023 OUT023 | 024=OUT024 River | 7. Enter the Description name using the alphabet or
025=OUT025
027=OUT027
OUT025
OUT027
|
|
026=OUT026
028=OUT028
OUT026
OUT028
|
|
numerical keys. When [Enter] is pressed, the De-
029=OUT029 Atlantic Ocean | 030=OUT030 OUT030 | scription name will be set.
031=OUT031 OUT031 | 032=OUT032 OUT032 |

F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn F5:PASTE Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Example of Destination Name Setting Screen

5-10 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
 5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE L : SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT

K : DEFAULT TABLE
Purpose
Purpose Assign the physical numbers of the switcher to the destina-
This menu is used to initialize the table data. Do not tion numbers, source numbers and the levels of the virtual
perform this menu when modifying the table data. matrix.
Do not assign the same number.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [K]. The message “RESET TO Setting Procedure
DEFAULT TABLE? (y/n)” will be displayed at the 1. Select menu item [L].
bottom of the screen. 2. Each time [F5] is pressed, the setting screen will
2. Initialization is performed when [Y] is pressed. To change as follows.
cancel initializing, press [N]. Source number setting screen → destination number
setting screen → source number setting screen.
n
The table data will be lost when performing the menu item . Source Number Setting Procedure
[K]. 3. Select the source number setting screen.
4. Select the physical number and the level using the
cursor, and assign them to desired source number and
level on the virtual matrix. When [Enter] is pressed,
the physical assignment can be typed.
5. Enter the physical number using numerical keys, and
press [Enter].
6. Next, enter the physical level, and press [Enter] to set
it.
If press [Ctrl] _ [F] before setting, the physical
number and level will be returned to the previous
values.
If the physical number and physical level to be set has
been already used, cancel their settings first before
setting new ones.
To cancel, select the physical number and level to be
canceled, and press [Ctrl] _ [P].

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-11

5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

. Destination Number Setting Procedure [F2] : JUMP {To move the cursor to the desired destina-
Press [F5] to set the destination number setting screen. tion (source) number}
Then, perform the same procedure as for source. 1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
(SOURCE) NUMBER=” will be displayed.
PHYSICAL NUMBER ASSIGNMENT DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
2. Input the destination (source) number to be
retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
DESTINATION LEVEL
No. NAME VID A1 A2 4 5 6 7 8
001 OUT001 001-1 001-2 017-3 001-4 001-5 001-6 032-7 ...-.
002 OUT002 002-1 ...-. 018-3 002-4 005-5 002-6 031-7 ...-.
to the desired number.
003 OUT003 003-1 003-2 019-3 003-4 011-5 003-6 030-7 ...-.
004 OUT004 004-1 004-2 020-3 004-4 ...-. 004-6 ...-. ...-.
005 OUT005 005-1 005-2 ...-. 005-4 021-5 005-6 028-7 ...-. [F3] : Pg Up
006 OUT006
007 OUT007
006-1 006-2
007-1 007-2
...-.
...-.
006-4
...-.
026-5
...-.
006-6
007-6
027-7
...-.
...-.
...-.
When [F3] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
008 OUT008 008-1 008-2 ...-. ...-. 036-5 008-6 025-7 ...-. lines previous to the 16 lines displayed currently.
009 OUT009 009-1 009-2 ...-. ...-. 041-5 009-6 024-7 ...-.
010 OUT010 001-8 010-2 ...-. ...-. 046-5
010-6 023-7 ...-. [F4] : Pg Dn
When [F4] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
011 OUT011 002-8 011-2 ...-. ...-. 051-5 011-6 022-7 ...-.
012 OUT012 003-8 012-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. 012-6 021-7 ...-.
013 OUT013 004-8 013-2 ...-. ...-. 013-5 013-6 ...-. ...-. lines next to the 16 lines displayed currently.
014 OUT014 005-8 014-2 ...-. ...-. 014-5 014-6 ...-. ...-.
015 OUT015 006-8 015-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. 015-6 ...-. ...-. [F5] : SOURCE (DEST.)
When [F5] is pressed, the number setting screen
016 OUT016 007-8 016-2 ...-. ...-. ...-. 016-6 017-7 ...-.
017 OUT017 008-8 ...-. ...-. ...-. 017-5 017-6 016-7 ...-.

018 OUT018 009-8 ...-. ...-. ...-. 018-5 018-6 015-7 ...-.
will change between the destination number setting
F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn F5:SOURCE Ctrl-P:DELETE Ctrl-E:MENU screen and source number setting screen alternately.

Example of Setting Screen m

1. The physical number is the input/output number
Operating Function Keys specified at the menu item [A : SET UNIT LOCA-
[F1] : SEARCH {To move the cursor to the desired TION].
destination (source) name} 2. The virtual input/output name and the virtual level
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input DEST name are assigned to the buttons on the remote control
(SOURCE) NAME =” will be displayed. unit.
2. Input the destination (source) name to be
retrieved.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired name.

n
When menu item [J] is set to the Description name
mode, [F1] (SEARCH) will have the following
functions.
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input NAME
=” will be displayed.
2. Enter the Description name (within seven
characters) from the head.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the Description name
entered will be searched.
4. If the desired name does not exist in the screen,
press [F1] again.

5-12 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

M: SET INHIBIT TABLE

Purpose Operating Function Keys

This menu is used to protect source numbers not to be [F1] : SEARCH (To move the cursor to the desired
selected for each destination. destination name)
When the secret function is set to a source name, the 1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
selected source cannot be output to all destinations. By NAME =” will be displayed.
using this menu, source numbers to be inhibited can be 2. Input the destination name to be retrieved.
assigned for each destination. 3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
to the desired name.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [M]. n
2. Select the source number for each destination name When menu item [J] is set to the Description name
using the cursor. When [Enter] is pressed, the setting mode, [F1] (SEARCH) will have the following
will be switched. functions.
“x” : Connectable crosspoint 1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input NAME =”
“_” : Unconnectable crosspoint will be displayed.
2. Enter the Description name (within seven
SET INHIBIT TABLE DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
characters) from the head.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the Description name
DEST. SOURCE
001 01--08 09--16 17--24 25--32 33--40 41--48 49--56 57--64 entered will be searched.
OUT001 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT002 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx 4. If the desired name does not exist in the screen,
OUT003 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xx----xx xxxx---x xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx press [F1] again.
OUT004 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xx----xx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT005 xxx-xxxx xxxxxxxx x------- -------- xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxx---x

[F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the desired destina-

OUT006 xxxxxxxx xxx-xxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT007 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx x------- xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT008 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xx------ xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxx-- ------xx xxxxxxxx tion number)
DEST. SOURCE
009 01--08 09--16 17--24 25--32 33--40
41--48 49--56 57--64 1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
OUT009 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT010 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xx------ -----xxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx NAME =” will be displayed.
OUT011 xxxxx-xx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xx------ -----xxx xxxxxxxx xx--xxxx
OUT012 xxxx-xxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
2. Input the destination number to be retrieved.
OUT013 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx x---xxxx --xxxxxx xxxxxxxx 3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
OUT014 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx x---xxxx --xxxxxx xxxxxxxx
OUT015 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx to the desired number.
OUT016 xxxxxxxx xxxx--xx xxxx-xxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx

F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F3:LEFT F4:RIGHT Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU [F3] : LEFT (To scroll to the next 64 sources on the left)

[F4] : RIGHT (To scroll to the next 64 sources on the
Example of Setting Screen right)

n
The setting area for this menu is 512 x 512. Set this
function (crosspoint disable setting function) within the
size specified for the system used.
Excess crosspoints will be ignored automatically.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-13

5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

N : SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP

Purpose Operating Function Keys

To register the Description names required for each remote [F1] : MOVE
control unit, set the group of Description names. Up to (To move the cursor up and down between the
eight such source and destination groups can be set. group setting screen and Description name list)
(Up to 160 names can be registered for one group.)
The top half of the screen is for setting the group and the [F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the desired element
bottom half displays the list of Description names. number)
1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input ELE-
Setting Procedure MENT NUMBER =” will be displayed.
1. Select menu item [N]. 2. Input the element number to be retrieved.
2. Move the cursor to the group number by pressing [B]. 3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
3. Enter the group number using the numerical keys, and to the desired number.
press [Enter] to set it.
4. Press [F1] to move the cursor to the lower side of [F3] : SOURCE (DEST.)
screen. When [F3] is pressed, the Description name list
5. Select a number and press [Enter]. The Description will be changed from destination to source.
name will be copied to the space of the lowest number [B] : GROUP
on the group setting screen. Press [B] to move the cursor to the group number
To erase the Description names on the group setting on the group setting screen.
screen, move the cursor to the number and press [BS],
[DEL] or [Ctrl] _ [P]. [L] : COPY (To copy all data in the Description name
group to other groups)
DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1 1. When [L] is pressed, the message “Please Input

GROUP 1 160 REMAIN Original Group Number =” will be displayed
001 ....... 002 .......
003 ....... 004 ....... to ask for the group number to be copied.
005 .......
007 .......
006
008
.......
.......
2. Input the group number to be copied with the
009 ....... 010 ....... numerical keys and press [Enter]. The data of
011 ....... 012 .......
013 ....... 014 ...... all group will be copied to the group setting
015 ....... 016 .......

screen currently displayed.
==================================================================

[S] : SEND (Transfers all data on the group setting

001=OUT001 OUT001 002=OUT002 OUT002
003=OUT003 OUT003 004=OUT004 OUT004
005=OUT005 OUT005 006=OUT006 OUT006
screen currently displayed to a secondary station)
007=OUT007 OUT007 008=OUT008 OUT008 1. When [S] is pressed, a message “Please Input
009=OUT009 OUT009 010=OUT010 OUT010
011=OUT011 OUT011 012=OUT012 OUT012 Station Number =” will be displayed to ask for
013=OUT013 OUT013 014=OUT014 OUT014
015=OUT015 OUT015 016=OUT016 OUT016
the number of a secondary station to which the
F1:MOVE F2:JUMP F3:SOURCE B:Group L:Copy S:Send Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU data is to be transferred.
2. Input the number of the secondary station using
Example of Setting Screen the numerical keys and press [Enter].
All data on the group setting screen currently
m displayed will be transferred to the secondary
1. In the remote control unit, the transferred data are all station.
displayed as input/output numbers.
This is because data is transferred using input/output
numbers instead of input/output names.
2. The group data of the primary and secondary stations’
must be always the same.
If the primary station data is changed after transfer, be
sure to transfer the new data to the secondary station.

5-14 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

. Transferring Data to the Secondary Station on

the Monitor S-BUS
To transfer the data on the group setting screen currently
displayed to a secondary station on the monitor S-BUS, the
number of the primary station on the monitor S-BUS must
be specified, in addition to the secondary station number.
Specify in the following way.

Please Input Station Number = [||||||] _ [||||||]

Station number of the Station number of the

primary station on secondary station on
monitor S-BUS monitor S-BUS

. Transferring Data to All Secondary Stations

Press [A] instead of entering station numbers. The
groupsetting data currently displayed will be transferred to
all secondary stations including the monitor S-BUS.

n
If a Description name is not in a secondary station, then,
when in Description name mode, the source or destination
name will be the corresponding Type + Num. name.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-15

5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

O: SET TIE LINES

Purpose 4. Input the source number using the numerical keys and
This menu is used to store the connection information of the press [Enter] to set it. If [Ctrl] _ [F] is pressed
matrix in the primary station and to set the tie line for switching before the setting, the original source name will be
several crosspoints using the remote control unit button. returned. When [Ctrl] _ [P] is pressed, the source
Using this method, peripheral units such as the signal name will be deleted and “ · · · · ” will be displayed.
converters can be used more efficiently. 5. After setting the source group, press [F5]. The top
The tie line consists of four input/output connectors as one half of the screen will be switched to the destination
group and paths connected between sources and destina- group setting screen.
tions. The tie line system consists of a maximum of 20
groups for sources and destinations respectively, and a SET TIE LINES DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

maximum of 40 groups for connections, called Net groups. SOURCE GROUPS
S001: 010(OUT010 ) S002: ...(.......) S003: ...(.......) S004: ...(.......)
011(OUT011 ) ...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......)
Setting Procedure 012(OUT012 ) ...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......)
013(OUT013 ) ...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......)
Before you perform the tie line management using two or S005: ...(....... ) S006: ...(.......) S007: ...(.......) S008: ...(.......)
...(....... ) ...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......)
three routing switchers, you should set the unit location ...(....... ) ...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......)
and the elements of the tie line as follows. ...(....... ) ...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......)

1. Set the offset of each unit on the menu screen [A : SET ===================================================================
P01:S -N -N -D P02:S -N -N -D
UNIT LOCATION] of the secondary station in order P03:S -N -N -D P04:S -N -N -D
to avoid repeated input/output numbers of multiple P05:S
P07:S
-N
-N
-N
-N
-D
-D
P06:S
P08:S
-N
-N
-N
-N
-D
-D
units and locate the units on one physical level. P09:S -N -N -D P10:S -N -N -D
P11:S -N -N -D P12:S -N -N -D
2. Set the elements of the tie line on the menu screen [O : P13:S -N -N -D P14:S -N -N -D
P15:S -N -N -D P16:S -N -N -D
SET TIE LINE]. P17:S -N -N -D P18:S -N -N -D
Select menu item [O]. P19:S -N -N -D P20:S -N -N -D

The top half of the screen is for setting the source group F1:MOVE F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn F5:GROUP Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

while the bottom half is for setting the tie line path.
Example of Destination Group Setting Screen
SET TIE LINES DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

SOURCE GROUPS
6. Set the destination group in the same way as for the
S001: ...(.......) S002: ...(.......) S003: ...(.......) S004: ...(.......) source group.
7. After setting the destination group, press [F5] and set
...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......)
...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......)
...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......)
S005: ...(.......) S006: ...(.......) S007: ...(.......) S008: ...(.......)
the net group setting screen.
...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......)
...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......)
...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......) ...(.......) SET TIE LINES DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

=================================================================== NET GROUPS
P01:S -N -N -D P02:S -N -N -D N001: LEVEL= 1 2 .... .... .... .... .... ....
P03:S -N -N -D P04:S -N -N -D 020(OUT020 )> 021(IN021 ) 022(OUT022 )> 022(IN022 )
P05:S -N -N -D P06:S -N -N -D 023(OUT023 )> 023(IN023 ) 024(OUT024 )> 024(IN024 )
P07:S -N -N -D P08:S -N -N -D N002: LEVEL= .... .... 3 4 .... .... .... ....
P09:S -N -N -D P10:S -N -N -D 025(OUT025 )> 025(IN025 ) 026(OUT026 )> 026(IN026 )
P11:S -N -N -D P12:S -N -N -D 027(OUT027 )> 027(IN027 ) 028(OUT028 )> 028(IN028 )
P13:S -N -N -D P14:S -N -N -D
P15:S -N -N -D P16:S -N -N -D LEVEL: 1=VID 2=A1 3=A2 4=4 5=5 6=6 7=7 8=8
P17:S -N -N -D P18:S -N -N -D
P19:S -N -N -D P20:S -N -N -D ===================================================================
P01:S -N -N -D P02:S -N -N -D
F1:MOVE F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn F5:GROUP Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU P03:S -N -N -D P04:S -N -N -D
P05:S -N -N -D P06:S -N -N -D
P07:S -N -N -D P08:S -N -N -D
Example of Source Group Setting Screen P09:S -N -N -D P10:S -N -N -D
P11:S -N -N -D P12:S -N -N -D
P13:S -N -N -D P14:S -N -N -D
P15:S -N -N -D P16:S -N -N -D
3. Select a source group number using the cursor and press P17:S -N -N -D P18:S -N -N -D
[Enter]. The source number input mode will be set. P19:S -N -N -D P20:S -N -N -D

Set the source name to the desired source group. F1:MOVE F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn F5:GROUP Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Example of Net Group Setting Screen

5-16 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
 5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

8. Select the number of net group with cursor keys and Operating Function Keys
press [Enter] to set the input mode. [F1] : MOVE
Set the signal path between two routing switchers, When [F1] is pressed, the cursor will move be-
using the combination of the tween upper and lower of the screen.
“OUT of the front stage” > “IN of the latter stage”.
9. Input the source number and the destination number [F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the group number of
with the numerical keys and press [Enter] to set it. the desired source)
When change the level, move the cursor to the level 1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input
and press [Enter]. GROUP NUMBER =” will be displayed.
10. Press [F1] to move the cursor to the tie line path 2. Input the group number of the source to be
setting screen. retrieved.
Set tie line paths using the combination of 3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
“Source group” _ “Net group” _ “Net group” _ to the desired number.
“Destination group”.
The two “Net groups” can be set at a maximum. [F3] : Pg Up
However, leave one “Net group” blank when there are When [F3] is pressed, the top half of the screen will
two routing switchers to be connected. display the 6 lines previous to the 6 lines displayed
11. Move the cursor to a path number and press [Enter]. currently.
The source group input mode will be set. [F4] : Pg Dn
12. Input the source group number and press [Enter]. The When [F4] is pressed, the top half of the screen will
cursor will move to the net group. Input the net group display the 6 lines next to the 6 lines displayed
and destination group in the same way as for the currently.
source group. Up to two net groups can be input for [F5] : GROUP
one path. (To move the cursor to the top half of the screen
13. Use the above procedure to assign the source, destina- and press [F5]. The display will change: “Source
tion and net numbers to each path number. Gp” → “Destination Gp” → “Net Gp”.)
[F5] : DISP
(To move the cursor to the bottom half of the screen
and press [F5]. The display will change : “Path” →
“Source Name” → “Destination Name”.)

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-17

5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

P : CHANGE PASSWORD Q: CHANGE CROSSPOINT

Purpose Purpose
This menu is used to change the password. This menu is used to display the crosspoints and change
them.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [P]. Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [Q].
2. Input the password currently set, and press [Enter].
2. Select the item using the cursor. Change only the
In the default status, password is not set in DVS-
source name.
V3232B/V6464B. 3. When [Enter] is pressed, the source name input mode
Once the password is set, the menu items can not be will be set. When either key is pressed before entering
set or changed unless the password is entered. the source name, the mode will be canceled and the
If a wrong password is input, the demand for password previous display will be returned.
input will be displayed again. 4. Select the code assigned to each type name, and enter
3. Enter a new password, and press [Enter]. The new the source name using the numerical keys.
password is verified again. 5. When [Enter] is pressed, the crosspoint will be set. If
4. After the new password has been confirmed twice, the [Ctrl] _ [F] is pressed before the setting, the original
screen will return to the menu screen. setting will be returned.
5. If not confirmed, the password is demanded again. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen will be
displayed.
CHANGE PASSWORD DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
m
Please Input New Password = ________________*

1. When the power of the primary station is
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU turned on, “ · · · · ” will be displayed for a while at the
source name position. But once the status of the cross-
Example of Setting Screen points is detected, the source name set before hand will
be displayed.
n 2. Outputs whose destination names are not assigned will
If you forget the password, settings cannot be performed be displayed with “ · · · · ”, and crosspoint switching
unless the unit is returned to default. cannot be performed for these.
As all table data will be erased when returned to default, be 3. Moreover, names set with the protect function cannot
sure you should not forget the password. be switched either.
4. When entering the Description name, enter 7 charac-
ters from the head.

CHANGE CROSSPOINT DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

LEVEL=1
DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE DEST SOURCE

OUT001 -IN001 OUT002 -IN002 OUT003 -IN003 OUT004 -IN004
OUT005 -IN005 OUT006 -IN006 OUT007 -IN007 OUT008 -IN008
OUT009 -IN009 OUT010 -IN010 OUT011 -IN011 OUT012 -IN012
OUT013 -IN013 OUT014 -IN014 OUT015 -IN015 OUT016 -IN016
OUT017 -IN017 OUT018 -IN018 OUT019 -IN019 OUT020 -IN020
OUT021 -IN021 OUT022 -IN022 OUT023 -IN023 OUT024 -IN024
OUT025 -IN025 OUT026 -IN026 OUT027 -IN027 OUT028 -IN028
OUT029 -IN029 OUT030 -IN030 OUT031 -IN031 OUT032 -IN032
OUT033 -IN033 OUT034 -IN034 OUT035 -IN035 OUT036 -IN036
OUT037 -IN037 OUT038 -IN038 OUT039 -IN039 OUT040 -IN040
OUT041 -IN041 OUT042 -IN042 OUT043 -IN043 OUT044 -IN044
OUT045 -IN045 OUT046 -IN046 OUT047 -IN047 OUT048 -IN048
OUT049 -IN049 OUT050 -IN050 OUT051 -IN051 OUT052 -IN052
OUT053 -IN053 OUT054 -IN054 OUT055 -IN055 OUT056 -IN056
OUT057 -IN057 OUT058 -IN058 OUT059 -IN059 OUT060 -IN060
OUT061 -IN061 OUT062 -IN062 OUT063 -IN063 OUT064 -IN064

0=IN 1=OUT 2=.... 3=.... 4=.... 5=.... 6=.... 7=....
8=.... 9=.... A=.... B=.... C=.... D=.... E=.... F=GPHA

F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn F5:Level Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Example of Setting Screen

5-18 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

Operating Function Keys [F2] : JUMP (To move the cursor to the desired destina-
[F1] : SEARCH (To select a destination name) tion number)
1. When [F1] is pressed, “Please Input DEST 1. When [F2] is pressed, “Please Input DEST
NAME =” will be displayed. NUMBER =“ will be displayed.
2. Input the destination name to be retrieved. 2. Input the destination number to be retrieved.
In the Description name mode, input the 3. When [Enter] is pressed, the cursor will move
Description name (within seven characters) to the desired destination number.
from the head.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the destination name [F3] : Pg Up
entered will be searched. When [F3] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
4. If the desired name does not exist in the screen, lines previous to the 16 lines displayed currently.
press [F1] again. [F4] : Pg Dn
When [F4] is pressed, the screen will display the 16
n lines next to the 16 lines displayed currently.
If there are several names whose typed characters are the [F5] : LEVEL
same in the Description name mode, move the cursor to the When [F5] is pressed, a level can be selected.
first name displayed and press [Enter] to continue moving Select the level number using the numerical key and
the cursor to the next name. press [Enter]. If [A] is pressed instead of the
numerical key and press [Enter] here, the screen
[F1] : SEARCH (To select a source name) will display a list of all levels. The function keys
In the Description name mode, the setting proce- [F1], [F2], and [F5] on the ALL screen have the
dure is as follows. same functions as those of the initial screen menu
1. When [Enter] is pressed, the source input item [Q].
mode will be set.
2. Input the desired Description name (within CHANGE CROSSPOINT DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
LEVEL=ALL
seven characters) from the head. LEVEL:

3. Every time [F1] is pressed, the desired name No.

001
out
OUT001
1=VID
IN001
2=A1
IN001
3=A2
IN017
4=4
IN001
5=5
IN001
6=6
IN001
7=7
IN001
8=8
.....
will be searched. 002 OUT002 IN002 IN002 IN018 IN002 IN002 IN002 IN002 .....
003 OUT003 IN003 IN003 IN019 IN003 IN003 IN003 IN003 .....
4. When the desired name is displayed, press 004 OUT004 IN004 IN004 IN020 IN004 ..... IN004 ..... .....
005 OUT005 IN005 IN005 ..... IN005 IN005 IN005 IN005 .....
Return or Enter to set the crosspoint. 006 OUT006 IN006 IN006 ..... IN006 IN006 IN006 IN006 .....
007 OUT007 IN007 IN007 ..... IN007 IN007 IN007 IN007 .....
008 OUT008 IN008 IN008 ..... IN008 IN008 IN008 IN008 .....
009 OUT009 IN009 IN009 ..... IN009 ..... IN009 IN009 .....
010 OUT010 IN010 IN010 ..... IN010 IN010 IN010 IN010 .....
011 OUT011 IN011 IN011 ..... IN011 IN011 IN011 IN011 .....
012 OUT012 IN012 IN012 ..... IN012 IN012 IN012 IN012 .....
013 OUT013 IN013 IN013 ..... IN013 ..... IN013 ..... .....
014 OUT014 IN014 IN014 ..... IN014 IN014 IN014 IN014 .....
015 OUT015 IN015 IN015 IN015 IN015 IN015 IN015 IN015 .....
016 OUT016 IN016 IN016 IN016 IN016 IN016 IN016 IN016 .....

0=IN 1=OUT 2=.... 3=.... 4=.... 5=.... 6=.... 7=....
8=.... 9=.... A=.... B=.... C=.... D=.... E=.... F=GPHA

F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F5:Level Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Example of Setting Screen

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-19

5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

R : CALL SECONDARY STATION S : SELECT INDICATION COLOR

(Except for BKPF-R70 and HDS-V3232)
Purpose
This menu is used to call the menu of the secondary station Purpose
connected to the S-BUS of the primary station. If this menu is set to “ON”, the screen will show a color
display during the use of the Sony control terminal BAC-
Operating Procedure 1200.
1. Select the menu item [R] at the menu screen.
A message will be displayed on the screen. Setting Procedure
2. Enter the station number of the secondary station, and 1. Select menu item [S].
press [Enter]. The display will be changed to the 2. When [S], [Enter] is pressed, the setting condition
menu screen of the secondary station. displayed will be switched (“ON” → “OFF” → ”ON”
3. If [Ctrl] _ [D] is pressed, the screen will return to the ...).
menu screen of the primary station.
n
m As wrong characters will be displayed before and after the
1. If the specified secondary station does not exist on the menu items when a control terminal except Sony control
S-BUS data link, the following message will be terminal BAC-1200 is used, be sure to set to “OFF”.
displayed.
Display: “Station dose not exist”
2. If the specified secondary station is not T : SET CLOCK
available for communication, the following message
will be displayed. Purpose
Check at the menu item [F : SET ACTIVE UNIT This menu is used for the setting of the time. The time set
NUMBER]. at this menu will be used for recording the time of error
Display: “Disable Station” occurrence.

CALL STATION NUMBER ? Setting Procedure

Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU 1. Select menu item [T].
2. Enter the time using the numerical keys, and press
Setting Screen
[Enter] to set it.
The screen will be changed to the menu screen
automatically.

n
If [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed without pressing [Enter], the
screen will return to the menu screen and the setting
modification becomes invalid.

1993.02.03-22:24(Y.M.D-H:M) READ TIME

CHANGE TO = 1993.02.03-22:24

Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENUÅ

Example of Setting Screen

5-20 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

U : SELECT REMOTE

Purpose n
This menu is used to control the routing switcher using the How to use UA2 Code:
9-pin remote (REMOTE 2), and to set the control mode to The original use of the UA2 code in the RS-422A protocol
the DIRECT mode or the S-BUS conversion mode. is to identify the multiple equipments which are connected
by loop-through connection, and be controlled.
Setting Procedure Each equipment is controlled by the control command with
1. Select menu item [U]. UA2 code which corresponds to the unit address of each
2. Select channel using the cursor keys. equipment.
3. Press [Enter], and the setting condition displayed will
be changed. The UA2 code is converted to the level control command
DIRECT → CONVERT RS422 (CART +) to S-BUS when the RS-422A commands are converted to the S-BUS
levels.
SELECT CONTROL MODE DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

CHANNEL A --- REMOTE FUNCTION = CONVERT RS422(CART+) to S-BUS The following examples show how UA2 codes are con-

CHANNEL B --- REMOTE FUNCTION = DIRECT
verted to the S-BUS level.

→ →
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
UA2 = 01 00000001 S-BUS level 1
Example of Setting Screen UA2 = 02 → 00000010 → S-BUS level 2
UA2 = 04 → 00000100 → S-BUS level 3
DIRECT: UA2 = 08 → 00001000 → S-BUS level 4
In this mode commands received using RS-422A are not UA2 = 10 → 00010000 → S-BUS level 5
converted to those for the S-BUS (REMOTE 1) and are UA2 = 20 → 00100000 → S-BUS level 6
directly used for controlling the receiving station. If this UA2 = 40 → 01000000 → S-BUS level 7
mode is selected, a protocol must be selected at the UA2 = 80 → 10000000 → S-BUS level 8
secondary station. UA2 = FF → 11111111 → S-BUS All level

CONVERT RS-422 (CART +) to S-BUS The following combinations of levels are also possible.
This mode converts commands received using the RS-
422A to those for the S-BUS. UA2 = 03 → 00000011 → S-BUS level 1 and 2
UA2 = 07 → 00000111 → S-BUS level 1, 2 and 3

n
The S-BUS conversion mode can be used only when the
primary station is controlled by the 9-pin remote control.
Therefore, use the DIRECT mode whenever a secondary
station is controlled by the 9-pin remote control.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-21

5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

V : SELECT WARNING DISPLAY

Purpose n
This menu is used to set the warning message displayed on Some messages will not be displayed, depending on the
the system status screen. models.

Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [V].
2. Press [V], [Enter], and the setting conditions dis-
played will be switched.(“ON” → “OFF”).
“OFF” : Displays important messages only
<Reference>
“X-POINT ERROR IN STATION * *”
“X-POINT RECOVERED IN STATION * *”

“TEMPERATURE RISE IN STATION * *”

“TEMPERATURE RECOVERED IN STATION * *”

“FAN STOP IN STATION * *”

“FAN RECOVERED IN STATION * *”

“S-BUS LINK DISCONNECTED TO CHANNEL”

“S-BUS LINK CONNECTED TO CHANNEL”

“ON” : Displays all messages

Displays the following in addition to the above
<Reference>
“BACKUP POWER SUPPLY DOWN IN STATION
* *”
“BACKUP POWER SUPPLY RECOVERED IN
STATION * *”

“MISSING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN STATION * *”

“REFERENCE SIGNAL CORRECTLY FED TO
STATION * *”

“VALID INPUT OR OUTPUT BOARD IN STA-

TION * *”
“INVALID INPUT OR OUTPUT BOARD IN STA-
TION * *”

“BACKUP CPU DOWN IN STATION * *”

“BACKUP CPU RECOVERED IN STATION * *”

“STATION * * FAILURE (DISCONNECTED OR

POWER DOWN)”
“STARTED BY DVS-V6464B Ver1.00 IN STATION
* *”

“DIFFERENT CHECK SUM=35DB IN STATION * *”

5-22 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

W:SYSTEM STATUS LOG X : DISPLAY S-BUS COMMUNICATION

Purpose Purpose
This menu is used to check the error during self-diagnosis This menu is used to display the S-BUS data received at
of each station, the status of the S-BUS circuit, and the the primary station.
time of events.
Setting Procedure
SYSTEM STATUS LOG DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1 1. Select menu item [X].
2. To stop the scroll, press [Ctrl] _ [E]. (“TRACE

1990.10.12-15:42 S-BUS LINK DISCONNECTED
1990.10.27-09:28 STARTED BY BKS-R1601 Ver3.10 IN STATION 11
1990.11.03-05:31 STARTED BY BKS-R3204 Ver3.11 IN STATION 32
OFF” will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.)
1991.01.14-13:51 MISSING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN STATION 1 3. The menu screen will be returned when [Ctrl] _ [E] is
1991.02.01-11:15 POWER SUPPLY UNIT B DOWN IN STATION 4
1991.02.04-06:11 X-POINT ERROR IN STATION 1 pressed again.
-- end --
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

S-BUS COMMUNICATION TRACE ON

Example of Display
STATION No.011 01 01 0B 03 0E 00 08
STATION No.015 01 09 0F 03 0E 00 08
STATION No.011 01 01 0A FF 01 00 01
Operation Procedure STATION No.011 01 01 0F FF 01 00 01
1. Select menu item [W]. TRACE OFF
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
2. When all status cannot be displayed on the screen,
“ _ _ more _ _ ” will be displayed at the bottom of Example of Display
the screen. Press [SPACE] key to display the next
status. When all status have been displayed, “_ _ end n
_ _” will be displayed. For details on the contents of the display, refer to the S-
3. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to return to the menu screen. BUS Protocol Manual.

System Status Screen

Refer to “6. Confirmation of Function” for detail of the
system status screen.

n
. To erase the LOG contents in DVS-V3232B/V6464B,
set the S3 switch on the CPU-149 board to “C” (Clear)
and then press the S5 switch (Reset).
After erasing, be sure to return the S3 switch to “0” and
press the S5 switch (Reset) again.
. To erase the LOG contents in HDS-V3232, set the S2
switch on the CPU-251 board to “C” (Clear) and then
press the S8 switch (Reset).
After erasing, be sure to return the S2 switch to “0” and
press the S8 switch (Reset) again.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-23

5-1. Setting Items of the Primary Station

Y : DISPLAY TABLE (Except for HDS-V3232) Z : SET UNIT DETECTABLE

Purpose Purpose
This menu is used to display the table data set with the This menu is used to check the possibility of communica-
control terminal. tion of secondary stations connected to the S-BUS data
link periodically.
Operation Procedure During checking, “?” appears. After the completion of
1. Select menu item [Y]. The following message will be checking, the code number indicating the type of each
displayed at the bottom of the screen. device appears.
Display : “DISPLAY TABLE DATA? (y/a/n)” If the secondary station does not communicate for a given
2. Press [E], and the signal format (4: 2: 2/4 fsc) set for period, the message below appears.
each input/output will be displayed in hexadecimal.
(DVS-V* * * * series only.) “STATION * * * FAILURE (DISCONNECT OR POWER DOWN)”
Press [A], and all table data will be displayed in Station number
hexadecimal.
When [N] is pressed, the table data display will be Setting Procedure
canceled. 1. Select the menu item [Z].
3. If [SPACE] is pressed during the display, the display 2. Select a secondary station you want to check using the
will be interrupted. When [SPACE] is pressed once cursor.
again, the display will begin. 3. Press [Enter], and “?” appears.
4. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to stop the display. The menu To cancel “?”, press [Enter] again.
screen will be displayed. 4. Press [Ctrl] _ [E], and the display is changed to the
menu screen to begin checking.
DISPLAY TABLE DATA DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1 5. After about ten seconds, select the menu item [Z]. If

0000:49 4E 00 00 00 00 00 00 4F 55 54 00 00 00 00 00 : IN......OUT.....
the secondary station is available for communication,
0010:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................ “?” changes to a device code number.
0020:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0030:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0040:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0050:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
n
0060:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................ A secondary station to be checked should be set available
0070:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
0080:56 49 44 00 00 00 00 00 41 31 00 00 00 00 00 00 : VID.....A1...... for communication in advance at menu item [F : SET
0090:41 32 00 00 00 00 00 00 34 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : A2......4.......
00A0:35 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 36 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : 5.......6.......
ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER]
00B0:37 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 38 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : 7.......8.......
00C0:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
SET UNIT DETECTABLE DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
00D0:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................

00E0:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 FF FF 10 00 00 02 : ................
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

+
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENUÅ
001-020 M ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
021-040 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
Example of Display 041-060 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
061-080 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?
081-100
101-120
n 121-140
For the contents of the table data, refer to the S-BUS 141-160
161-180
Protocol Manual. 181-200
201-220
221-240
241-254 * * * * * *

01:DVS-V1616 02:DVS-V3232 03:DVS-A3232 04:BKS-R1601 05:BKS-R3202
06:BKS-R3203 07:BKS-R3281 08:DVS-V6464 09:BKS-R5000 10:DVS-RS1616
11:DVS-TC3232 12:BKDM-5080 13:BKS-R3204 14:BKS-R3205 15:BKS-R3206
16:BKS-R3280 17:BZR-1000 18:DVS-V3232B 19:DVS-V6464B

Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Example of Setting Screen

5-24 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

A:SET UNIT LOCATION

Purpose m
This menu is used to set the input/output location of the 1. In the initial status (factory setting), the head number
routing switcher. is set to “1”.
2. When DVS-V3232B/V6464B, BKPF-R70 or HDS-
Setting Procedure V3232 is used as the primary station, input/output
1. Select menu item [A]. number can be set freely using the menu item [L : SET
2. Use the cursor keys ([&], [*] to select the setting PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT].
item. The setting values in this menu are physical input/
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the offset value of the input output/level numbers.
number and the output number can be typed. When selecting crosspoints from the remote control
4. Enter the offset value using the numerical keys. unit, the virtual input/output/level numbers set at the
5. Press [Enter] to set the offset value. menu item [L] are used. In the initial status of [L], the
If [Ctrl] _ [F] is pressed before the setting, the physical numbers equal the virtual numbers.
original offset value will be returned.
(Input)
The location is assigned consecutive numbers from the 512 1
offset value. The following table lists the input and 1

output control area assigned from the head number Setting

164 101
consecutively. 101 Area

Model Input Output Setting Equivalent

Control Control area Unit DVS-V6464B
area area 164 Location
DVS-V6464B 64 64 1 to 512
DVS-V3232B 32 32 1 to 512
HDS-V3232
BVS-A3232 256 32 1 to 256 DVS-TC3232 512
BVS-V3232 (Output)
BVS-A3232
DVS-V1616 16 16 1 to 512
DVS-RS1616 128 16 1 to 128

6. The menu screen of the secondary station will be

displayed when [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed.

SET UNIT LOCATION DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

SOURCE No 0001-0064 DESTINATION No 0001-0064 LEVEL No 1

Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Example of Setting Screen

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-25

5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

G:UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER

Purpose
This menu is used to copy the table data stored in the main
CPU board of the secondary station to the backup CPU
board.
This setting is valid only when the optional CPU board is
installed to the secondary station.

Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [G]. The message “This process
requires about 1 minutes. Execute? (y/n)” will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
2. Table data copying is performed when [Y] is pressed.
To cancel copying, press [N].
3. In some software, when copying has been completed,
“PROGRAM TABLE ok? (y/n)” may be displayed at
the same position. In this case, press [Y].

m
1. The ROM version of the main CPU board and that of
the backup CPU board must be the same. If different
versions are used, the unit may hang up due to copy-
ing. Remove the backup CPU board when this occurs.
The above occurs because a new table data can not be
run on the old version software.
2. It takes about 1 minutes to copy the table data.
3. The table data of transcode from RS-422A to S-BUS
(set at menu item [U] of a secondary station) is not
copied to the backup CPU board.
4. When you copy the data of main CPU to
backup CPU on the menu screen [G : UPDATE
BACKUP CONTROLLER] of the primary station or a
secondary station, you can abort the operation by
pressing [Ctrl] _ [D].
However you should copy again for the data of the
backup CPU is not correct if aborted. Even if you do
not copy again, the data will be renewed in one hour
approximately by the auto backup function.

5-26 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

H : SET PHANTOM TABLE

Purpose n
This menu is used to set PHANTOM which switchers If a Description name has been set for the input/output
several crosspoints, using the source selection button of the number, the display of Description has priority to the
remote control unit. display of “Type + Number” even if the “Type + Number”
name is set.
Setting Procedure
1. Call the menu screen of the remote control unit to be set, SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3204 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 16
SET PHANTOM TABLE (PHANTOM:DESTINATION<SOURCE-LEVEL) (G.PHANTOM NAME:NUMBER)
using menu item [R], and then select menu item [H]. IN001 :OUT001 <IN001 -0 IN002 :OUT001 <IN002 -0 IN003 :OUT001 <IN003 -0
IN004 :OUT001 <IN004 -0 IN005 :OUT001 <IN005 -0 IN006 :OUT001 <IN006 -0
2. Select a item using the cursor. SONY007:OUT001 <SONY007-0 SONY008:OUT001 <SONY008-0 IN007 :OUT002 <IN001 -0
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the phantom table can be set. IN008 :OUT002 <SONY020-0 IN009 :OUT002 <IN003 -0 IN010 :OUT002 <IN004 -0
VTR005 :OUT002 <IN005 -0 VTR006 :OUT002 <IN006 -0 VTR007 :OUT002 <IN007 -0
If [Enter] is pressed before setting, the registration VTR008 :OUT002 <IN008 -0 SONY009:OUT001 <SONY009-0 SONY010:OUT001 <SONY010-0
IN011 :OUT001 <IN011 -0 IN012 :OUT001 <IN012 -0 SONY013:OUT001 <SONY013-0
will be deleted. SONY014:OUT001 <SONY014-0 SONY015:OUT001 <SONY015-0 IN016 :OUT001 <IN016 -0
VTR009 :OUT002 <IN009 -0 VTR010 :OUT002 <IN010 -0 VTR011 :OUT002 <IN011 -0
4. Input the data to the phantom table. The phantom VTR012 :OUT002 <IN012 -0 VTR013 :OUT002 <IN013 -0 VTR014 :OUT002 <IN014 -0
function consists of the global phantom function VTR015 :OUT002 <IN015 -0 VTR016 :OUT002 <SONY020-0 .......:.......<.......-.
.......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-.
registered at the primary station, the normal type of .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-.
.......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-.
local phantom function registered at each remote .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-.
control unit and the destination off set type of local .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-.
.......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-.
phantom function. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-.
.......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-. .......:.......<.......-.
0=SONY 1=VTR 2=SUP 3=CB 4=AIR 5=ME 6=PGM 7=CL

. Setting the Global Phantom Function 8=SL 9=L A=RET B=MIX C=JEEP D=OSC E=L/A F=REN
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-N:NAME G:GLOBAL PHANTOM
Input the phantom name with the type name and the
number. Next, press [G] at destination name position. Example of Setting Screen (Normal Type)
Lastly, input the global phantom number (four digits) set at
the primary station. . Setting the Local Phantom of the Destination
Offset Type
. Setting the Normal Type of Local Phantom Enter the phantom name, source name and level number in
Function the same way as the ordinary local phantom.
a) At [J : NAME STYLE (Type + Num)] in the When [+] is depressed while the cursor is positioned in the
primary station menu item [J], input the type name DESTINATION column, the system enters the Replace-
(between 0 and F) and the number for the phantom ment Variable “DST + n” input mode. Enter the offset
name, destination name, source name and level value “n” in this status.
number respectively. (When the remote control unit SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3216 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 4
button is pressed, crosspoints with the same phan- SET PHANTOM TABLE (PHANTOM:DESTINATION<SOURCE-LEVEL) (G.PHANTOM NAME:NUMBER)
PHANTOM | DEST | SOURCE | LEVEL1-8 | PHANTOM | DEST | SOURCE | LEVEL1-8
tom name will be switched together.) SONY001 : OUT001 < IN001 - 10000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
b) At [J : NAME STYLE (DESCRIP. NAME)] in the ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
primary station menu item [J], input the phantom ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
name and level number in the same way as a). For ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
the source name and destination name, the Descrip- ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
tion name and “Type + Number” name can be ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
selected freely. ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000

Each time [Ctrl] _ [N] are pressed, the Description

....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
name input mode and “Type + Number” name input ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
mode will be switched alternately. ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
0=IN 1=OUT 2=SONY 3=VTR 4=SUP 5=CB 6=AIR 7=ME
Description name input mode : 8=PGM 9=CL A=SL B=L C=RET D=MIX E=JEEP F=OSC
G=L/A H=REM I=CAM J=STDO K=AUX L=COV M=BS N=CS
Use the alphabet and numerical keys to enter seven O=SAT P=CG Q=WETH R=TEST S=HD T=D1- U=D2- V=SEG
characters from the head of the Description name. Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-N:Type + Num G:GLOBAL PHANTOM +:DST+

“Type + Number” name input mode :
Input in the same way as a). Example of Setting Screen (Destination Offset Type)

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-27

5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

5. When [Enter] is pressed, the phantom table will be Internal Process After TAKE Button Pressing :
set. When pressing the TAKE button after selecting a source/
6. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen of the phantom the following internal process is made. In BKS-
secondary station will be displayed. When [Ctrl] _ R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210, TAKE is processed immedi-
[D] is pressed, the menu screen of the primary station ately by pressing the source selection button.
will be displayed.

TAKE button is pressed

. Execution of Phantom Function
When the phantom function is performed by a remote
control unit, its operation conforms to this phantom table. Checks if the selected name exists on the phantom table
It is possible to switch with the specified level or to set ON If it exists If it does not exist
(1) or OFF (0) for each level. When level “0” is set or
Check if the data set in the
when “0” is set for all levels, the level value will that set phantom table is the global
for the destination name specified in the phantom table. phantom
The indication (specified on the menu item [E : SET YES NO
LEVEL TABLE] of the primary station) is as follows :
[Phantom name : Output terminal name < input terminal Output the global Select the source/destination
phantom number set in the phantom table
name – level setting].

Check if the secret or protect is set to the selected

source and destination

If neither If secret
Omit the source and destination
secret nor or protect
to which the secret or protect is
protect is is set
set
set

Check the level setting of the

remaining source and destination
for each name.
If the setting is 0, the level is
transferred from the destination
table

Output the signal switching request Process nothing

5-28 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE L : COPY TABLE DATA

K : DEFAULT TABLE
Purpose
Purpose This menu is used to copy the table data of the specified
This menu is used to initialize the table data. Do not remote control unit. This applies to the remote control unit
perform this menu when modifying the table data. as follow.
. Version 3.00 or later : BKS-R1601/R3202/R3203
Setting Procedure /R3204/R3205/R3206
1. Select menu item [K]. The message “RESET TO . Version 1.00 or later : BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210
DEFAULT TABLE ok ? (y/n)” will be displayed at
the bottom of the screen. Setting Procedure
2. Press [Y] to process the initialization. To cancel 1. Select menu item [L]. This item can be selected from
initializing, press [N]. both the menu and another setting screen.
2. As the message “Station Number?” will be displayed on the
n screen, input the station number of the unit to be copied.
The table data will be lost note when performing the menu Select the table name to be copied, from A, P, B and
item [K]. D, using the alphabet keys.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the table data will be copied,
and the screen will return to the setting screen.
4. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed again, the screen will
return to the menu screen of the secondary station.
When [Ctrl] _ [D] is pressed, the screen will return to
the menu screen of the primary station.

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3202 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 6

A:Copy All table
P:Copy PHANTOM table
B:Copy PANEL table
D:Copy Available Destination table
Inputs A,P,B,D,0-9 Selected = A
Station Number ?

Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN

Example of Setting Screen

Selected = A All the table data are copied.

Selected = P Data set at the menu item [H : SET PHAN-
TOM TABLE] are copied.
Selected = B Data set at the menu item [N : SET PANEL
TABLE] are copied.
Selected = D Data set at the menu item [O : SET AVAIL-
ABLE DESTINATION] are copied.

n
The copy function of BKS-R* * * * guarantees upper
compatibility only.
The remote control unit except for BKS-R1607/R1608/
R3209/R3210 may lost a part of the data, when coping the
data from Ver. 3.* * unit to Ver. 1.* * unit, a part of the
data may be lost (global phantom, etc.).
The function is effective when copying the data from Ver.
1.* * unit to Ver. 3.* * unit in a system.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-29
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

M: SET MONITOR FUNCTION N : SET PANEL TABLE (BKS-R1601/R3202/R3203)

(Except for HDS-V3232)

Purpose Purpose
This menu is used to set the monitor S-BUS. As this This menu is used to assign source name to each source
monitor function is controlled by the local CPU, it has a selection button.
monitor data link that is independent from the standard S-
BUS data link. Setting Procedure
Therefore, it is necessary to set the primary station and 1. Select menu item [N].
secondary stations for the monitor S-BUS. 2. Select a button number using the cursor.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the source name can be
Setting Procedure typed. If [Enter] is pressed before inputting the
(For the Primary Station on the Monitor S-BUS) source name, the registration will be deleted.
1. Select menu item [M]. 4. Select the code assigned to each type name, and use
2. The menu screen of the primary station on the monitor the numerical keys to enter the source name.
S-BUS will be displayed. 5. Press [Enter] to set the source name.
6. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to return to the menu screen of the
For details of setting this menu, refer to “5-3. Setting Items secondary station.
of the Primary Station on Monitor S-BUS”. Press [Ctrl] _ [D] to return to the menu screen of the
primary station.
SET MONITOR FUNCTION DVS-V6464B Monitor Bus I/F V2.10

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R1601 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 11
MODIFICATION COMMAND SET PANEL TABLE( SOURCE )

F: SET SCTIVE UNIT NUMBER 01 KEY=IN001 02 KEY=IN002 03 KEY=IN003 04 KEY=IN004
05 KEY=IN005 06 KEY=IN006 07 KEY=SONY007 08 KEY=SONY008
M: SELECT MONITOR FUNCTION (COMBINED) 09 KEY=SONY009 10 KEY=SONY010 11 KEY=IN011 12 KEY=IN012
13 KEY=SONY013 14 KEY=SONY014 15 KEY=SONY015 16 KEY=IN016
R: CALL SECONDARY STATION
0=SONY 1=VTR 2=SUP 3=CB 4=AIR 5=ME 6=PGM 7=CL
8=SL 9=L A=RET B=MIX C=JEEP D=OSC E=L/A F=REN

Example of Setting Screen
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN

Example of Setting Screen

5-30 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

N : SET PANEL TABLE (BKS-R1607/R1608/R3204/R3205/R3209/R3210/R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621)

Purpose SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3219 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 3
This menu is used to assign source/destination name to SET PANEL TABLE(SOURCE) CONTROL DESTINATION = OUT001
01 KEY=IN001 02 KEY=IN002 03 KEY=IN003 04 KEY=IN004
each source/destination button. 05 KEY=IN005 06 KEY=IN006 07 KEY=IN007 08 KEY=IN008
09 KEY=....... 10 KEY=....... 11 KEY=....... 12 KEY=.......
13 KEY=....... 14 KEY=....... 15 KEY=....... 16 KEY=.......
Setting Procedure 17 KEY=IN009 18 KEY=IN010 19 KEY=IN011 20 KEY=IN012
21 KEY=IN013 22 KEY=IN014 23 KEY=IN015 24 KEY=IN016
1. Select menu item [N]. 25 KEY=....... 26 KEY=....... 27 KEY=....... 28 KEY=.......
29 KEY=....... 30 KEY=....... 31 KEY=....... 32 KEY=.......
2. Select a button number using the cursor.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the panel table can be typed. SET PANEL TABLE(DESTINATION)
01 KEY=....... 02 KEY=....... 03 KEY=....... 04 KEY=.......
To delete the registration, press [Enter] before 05 KEY=....... 06 KEY=....... 07 KEY=....... 08 KEY=.......
09 KEY=OUT001 10 KEY=OUT002 11 KEY=OUT003 12 KEY=OUT004
inputting the name. 13 KEY=OUT005 14 KEY=OUT006 15 KEY=OUT007 16 KEY=OUT008
4. a) When [J : NAME STYLE (Type + Num)] is 17 KEY=....... 18 KEY=....... 19 KEY=....... 20 KEY=.......
21 KEY=....... 22 KEY=....... 23 KEY=....... 24 KEY=.......
selected in the primary station menu, input the 25 KEY=OUT009 26 KEY=OUT010 27 KEY=OUT011 28 KEY=OUT012
29 KEY=OUT013 30 KEY=OUT014 31 KEY=OUT015 32 KEY=OUT016
type name (between 0 and F) and the number for
the source and destination name. 0=IN 1=OUT 2=SONY 3=VTR 4=SUP 5=CB 6=AIR 7=ME
8=PGM 9=CL A=SL B=L C=RET D=MIX E=JEEP F=OSC
b) Each time Ctrl N is pressed when [J : NAME G=L/A H=REM I=CAM J=STDO K=AUX L=COV M=BS N=CS
O=SAT P=CG Q=WETH R=TEST S=HD T=D1- U=D2- V=SEG
STYLE (DESCRIP. NAME)] is selected in the
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-N:DESCRIP.NAME T:TAKE M:MONI V:VTR E:LEVEL
primary station menu, the following input mode
will be switched alternately.
Example of Setting Screen

Description name input mode :

m
When “Ctrl_ N : Type + Num” is displayed on the
1. In the BKS-R1617/R1621, each button (key) can be
screen, it means that the name mode will be
set to both source and destination. In case source and
changed to “Type + Number” by pressing [Ctrl] _
destination are set to the same button (key), the DEST
[N].
button works as a destination button when the DEST
Input Description name from the first to seventh
button lights in amber and the DEST button works as a
characters using the alphabet and numerical keys.
source button when the DEST button lights in green.
“Type + Number” name input mode:
In the 4 DESTINATION mode, both source and
Input in the same way as a).
destination can be set to only buttons (keys) 01 to 04.
Other than setting of source button (key), the destina-
n
tions of block 1 to 4 can be set to destination buttons
If the Description name has been set for the input/output
01 to 04.
number, the display of Description has priority to the
Be sure to set either source or destination on the
display of “Type + Number” even if the “Type + Number”
respective buttons (keys) when setting other model.
name is set.
If both source and destination are set to the same
button (key), it will cause malfunction.
5. When [Enter] is pressed, the source name is set.
2. Set the table data of BKS-R3204/R3205/R3206 by
6. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen of the
eight buttons previously in the menu item [Z : SET
secondary station will be displayed.
____ PANEL STATUS]. If “KEY = ____” is
When [Ctrl] _ [D] is pressed, the menu screen of the
displayed on the key number position, the name can
primary station will be displayed.
not be input.
3. When setting description names to the source/destina-
tion buttons, select a name from the description name
group sent to the remote control unit.
If other names are input, these will not be set even if
the [Enter] button is pressed.
In such cases, transfer the group including the desired
description name from the primary station.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-31

5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

N : SET PANEL TABLE (BKS-R3206/R3216)

4. When “T : TAKE M : MONI” is displayed on the Purpose

screen, it means that the button on the source side can This menu is used to assign source name and destination
be set as the TAKE button or MONI button. name to be displayed.
Before pressing [Enter], select a key from the source
side. To set it as the TAKE button, press [T]; to set it Setting Procedure
as the MONITOR button, press [M]. The setting procedure is the same as that of menu item [N :
5. When “V : VTR” is displayed on the screen, it means SET PANEL TABLE] (BKS-R3204).
that the VTR control function can be assigned to the
buttons on the source side. m
Before pressing [Enter], select a key from the source 1. The setting of [SET PANEL TABLE (SOURCE)]
side and press [V]. assigns the source name and [SELECT DESTINA-
Enter the number according to the list of operations on TION] assigns the destination name.
the bottom of the screen. 2. The destination name can also be assigned using the
6. When “E : LEVEL” is displayed on the screen, it button on the front panel. Refer to the Operation
means that the level control function can be assigned Manual for setting.
to the buttons on the source side. 3. If “Type + number” name mode is selected in the
Before pressing [Enter], select a key from the source menu item [Z : SET PANEL STATUS], (refer to the
side and press [E]. Operation Manual of BKS-R3206) “SET PANEL
Enter the number according to the list of levels on the TABLE (SOURCE)” is not displayed.
bottom of the screen.
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3206 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 18
SET PANEL TABLE( SOURCE )
n 01 KEY=IN001 02 KEY=IN002 03 KEY=IN003 04 KEY=IN004
05 KEY=IN005 06 KEY=IN006 07 KEY=SONY007 08 KEY=SONY008
In BKS-R1607 of version V1.10 and higher, any desired 09 KEY=SONY009 10 KEY=SONY010 11 KEY=IN011 12 KEY=IN012
13 KEY=SONY013 14 KEY=SONY014 15 KEY=SONY015 16 KEY=IN016
button among the sixteen buttons can be set as a TAKE
button. SELECT DESTINATION
01 OUT001 02 OUT002 03 OUT003 04 OUT004
When this setting is performed, the name selected by the 05 OUT005 06 OUT006 07 OUT007 08 OUT008
09 OUT009 10 OUT010 11 OUT011 12 OUT012
SELECTOR knob on the front panel can be taken by 13 OUT013 14 OUT014 15 OUT015 16 OUT016
pressing the TAKE button.
0=IN 1=OUT 2=SONY 3=VTR 4=SUP 5=CB 6=AIR 7=ME
(Maximum inputs 512 x outputs 512) 8=PGM 9=CL A=SL B=L C=RET D=MIX E=JEEP F=OSC
G=L/A H=REM I=CAM J=STDO K=AUX L=COV M=BS N=CS
O=SAT P=CG Q=WETH R=TEST S=HD T=D1- U=D2- V=SEG
The actual setting procedure is as follows. Select a key
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-N:DESCRIP.NAME
from the source side which you want to use as the TAKE
button. Press the [T] button. Example of Setting Screen

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R1607 V1.10 STATION NUMBER 12

SET PANEL TABLE(SOURCE) CONTROL DESTINATION = OUT244
01 KEY=SRC004 02 KEY=SRC005 03 KEY=SRC006 04 KEY=SRC001
05 KEY=SRC002 06 KEY=SRC003 07 KEY=SRC007 08 KEY=SRC008
09 KEY=SRC009 10 KEY=SRC010 11 KEY=SRC013 12 KEY=SRC014
13 KEY=....... 14 KEY=....... 15 KEY=....... 16 KEY=TAKE

SET PANEL TABLE(DESTINATION)
01 KEY=....... 02 KEY=....... 03 KEY=....... 04 KEY=.......
05 KEY=....... 06 KEY=....... 07 KEY=....... 08 KEY=.......
09 KEY=....... 10 KEY=....... 11 KEY=....... 12 KEY=.......
13 KEY=OUT001 14 KEY=OUT012 15 KEY=OUT003 16 KEY=.......

0=SRC 1=OUT 2=2 3=3 4=4 5=5 6=6 7=7
8=8 9=9 A=A B=B C=C D=D E=E F=F

Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-N:DESCRIP.NAME T:TAKE

Example of Setting Screen

5-32 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

O: SET AVAILABLE DESTINATION O: SET AVAILABLE DESTINATION

(BKS-R3202/R3206) (BKS-R1607/R3210/R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/
R3220/R1621)
Purpose
This menu is used to set the destination which can be Purpose
selected by the remote control unit. This menu sets the range of selectable destinations and the
range of selectable sources corresponding to the range of
Setting Procedure selectable destinations.
1. Call the menu screen of the remote control unit to be
set using menu item [R], and then select menu item Setting procedure
[O]. 1. Invoke the menu display of the remote control unit to set
2. Select the destination using the cursor. the menu item [R]. Then select the menu item [O].
Press [(] and [)] when the cursor is placed at the top 2. Select a destination to be set using the cursor key.
or bottom, and the next destination number will When the key [(], [)] is pressed while the cursor key
appear. The destination numbers are 001 to 512. is located either top end or bottom end of display, the
3. When press [Enter], the status of the destination display moves to that of the next terminal number.
indicated by cursor will be changed. The output terminal numbers are from 001 to 512.
3. Pressing [Enter] toggles between selection and non-
m selection of destination shown by cursor.
. The destination name indicated on this screen can be m
selected from the remote control unit. . The destinations whose names are displayed, can be
. The destination indicated as “ · · · · ” is not registered selected from this remote control.
on the destination table. . The indication “ · · · · ” means that the name is not
. The blank destination can not be selected from the registered yet on the destination table.
remote control unit. . The blank destination cannot be selected from the
panel.
4. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to display the menu screen of the
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3216 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 4
secondary station. SELECT DESTINATION NAME
Press [Ctrl] _ [D] to display the menu screen of the 0001=OUT001 0002=OUT002 0003=OUT003 0004=OUT004
0005=OUT005 0006=OUT006 0007=OUT007 0008=OUT008
primary station. 0009=OUT009 0010=OUT010 0011=OUT011 0012=OUT012
0013=OUT013 0014=OUT014 0015=OUT015 0016=OUT016
0017=OUT017 0018=OUT018 0019=OUT019 0020=OUT020
0021=OUT021 0022=OUT022 0023=OUT023 0024=OUT024
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3202 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 7
0025=OUT025 0026=OUT026 0027=OUT027 0028=OUT028
SELECT DESTINATION NAME
0029=OUT029 0030=OUT030 0031=OUT031 0032=OUT032
001=OUT001 002=OUT002 003=OUT003 004=OUT004
0033=OUT033 0034=OUT034 0035=OUT035 0036=OUT036
005=OUT005 006=OUT006 007=OUT007 008=OUT008
0037=OUT037 0038=OUT038 0039=OUT039 0040=OUT040
009=OUT009 010=OUT010 011=OUT011 012=OUT012
0041=OUT041 0042=OUT042 0043=OUT043 0044=OUT044
013=OUT013 014=OUT014 015=OUT015 016=OUT016
0045=OUT045 0046=OUT046 0047=OUT047 0048=OUT048
017=OUT017 018=OUT018 019=OUT019 020=OUT020
0049=OUT049 0050=OUT050 0051=OUT051 0052=OUT052
021=OUT021 022=OUT022 023=OUT023 024=OUT024
0053=OUT053 0054=OUT054 0055=OUT055 0056=OUT056
025=OUT025 026=OUT026 027=OUT027 028=OUT028
0057=OUT057 0058=OUT058 0059=OUT059 0060=OUT060
029=OUT029 030=OUT030 031=OUT031 032=OUT032
0061=OUT061 0062=OUT062 0063=OUT063 0064=OUT064
033=OUT033 034=OUT034 035=OUT035 036=OUT036

037=OUT037 038=OUT038 039=OUT039 040=OUT040

041=OUT041 042=OUT042 043=OUT043 044=OUT044

045=OUT045 046=OUT046 047=OUT047 048=

049= 050=OUT050 051=OUT051 052=OUT052

053=OUT053 054=OUT054 055=OUT055 056=OUT056
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-F:SELECT SOURCE
057= 058= 059= 060=
061=OUT061 062=OUT062 063=OUT063 064=OUT064
Example of Setting Screen (Selectable Destination)
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN

Example of Setting Screen 4. Press [Ctrl] _ [F] to switch to the display allowing
setting of the selectable sources.

Pressing [Ctrl] _ [E] switches to the menu screen of

the secondary station.
Pressing [Ctrl] _ [D] returns to the menu screen of the
primary station.
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-33
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

. Procedure of setting SELECT SOURCE NAME (Input)

1024 164 101 64 1
1. Select an item to set using the cursor key.
2. Pressing [Enter] establishes the source name input
Block 2 Block 1
mode.
3. Enter the “Type + No.” name or description name.
4. Press [Enter] to confirm the input contents. 64

Example of setting
101
Block Source Destination
(Used area) (Input range) (Output range)
TOP END TOP END Block 3

1 1 64 1 64
164
2 101 164 1 64
3 101 164 101 164
1024
Virtual matrix (Output)
When the ranges of input and output selections are limited
as shown in the above table, the setting display and the
: Used areas
virtual matrix are configured as shown below.
: Un-used areas
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3216 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 4
SELECT SOURCE NAME
SRC TOP -SRC END =DST TOP -DST END m
001 IN001 -IN064 =OUT001 -OUT064
002 IN101 -IN164 =OUT001 -OUT064
1. When selecting the destinations that have no limit of
003 IN101 -IN164 =OUT101 -OUT164 range, the selectable range of sources is from 001 to
004 ....... -....... =....... -.......
005 ....... -....... =....... -....... 1024.
006 ....... -....... =....... -.......
007 ....... -....... =....... -.......
2. BKS-R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621
008 ....... -....... =....... -....... makes all the sources within the range that includes the

selected destinations valid. OUT001 makes the


multiple ranges of IN001 to IN064 and IN101 to
IN164 valid when the selection is made as shown in

“Example of Setting Screen”.

0=IN 1=OUT 2=SONY 3=VTR 4=SUP 5=CB 6=AIR 7=ME
8=PGM 9=CL A=SL B=L C=RET D=MIX E=JEEP F=OSC In BKS-R1607/R3210 of version V1.10 and higher, a pair
G=L/A H=REM I=CAM J=STDO K=AUX L=COV M=BS N=CS

O=SAT P=CG Q=WETH R=TEST S=HD T=D1- U=D2- V=SEG of source signal and key signal can be output as an inter-
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-N:Type + Num Ctrl-F:SELECT DESTINATION
locked pair using the offset-type phantom. (See OUT1 to
OUT4 in the following illustration.)
Example of Setting Screen
Odd number : Source
(Setting the range of selectable sources)
Even number : Key
(Input) 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
n
In BKS-R1607/R3210 of version V1.10 and higher, the sig- 1
nal switching cannot be performed when the destination 2
range that is set by SELECT SOURCE NAME is exceeded 3
4
even when the destination-type offset phantom has already
5
been set using the menu item [H]. Setting must be per- 6
formed so that the resultant value of destination after addi- 7
tion and subtraction of offset stays within the eight blocks of 8
SELECT SOURCE NAME. When the offset value is zero 9
(DST+0), the signal switching can be operated. (Output)

5-34 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

Example of setting :
SRC TOP-SRC END=DST TOP-DST END indicates the
applicable range of the offset-type phantom on the screen
of example setting. When the range from IN001 to IN008,
and the range from OUT001 to OUT004 are to be set as
the applicable range, enter as follows.
IN001-IN008=OUT001-OUT004

When you want execute the combinations of

OUT001<IN001 and OUT002<IN002, or the combinations
of OUT003<IN001 and OUT004<IN002, enter as follows.
Phantom:
IN001: DST+0<IN001-10000000
IN001: DST+1<IN002-10000000

Here, 10000000 means the level-1. The level-2 corre-

sponds to 0100000.
When the above settings are performed and the buttons
OUT001 and IN001 are pressed in this order, OUT001 is
replaced by OUT002 with DST+1.

Then,
OUT001<IN001
OUT002<IN002
of the level-1 are switched.

When the buttons OUT003 and IN001 are pressed in this

order,
OUT003<IN001
OUT004<IN001
of the level-1 are switched.

When OUT005 and IN001 are pressed, DST+0<IN001-

10000000 (i.e., OUT005<IN001) only are switched since it
is outside the applicable range.
Set the phantom for IN003, IN005 and IN007 in the same
way.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-35

5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

R : SET ROUTE (BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210/R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621)

Purpose SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3216 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 4
SET ROUTE(ROUTE DESTINATION:DESTINATION<SOURCE-LEVEL)
This is the function to display the source names that are ROUTE | DEST | SOURCE | LEVEL1-8 | ROUTE | DEST | SOURCE | LEVEL1-8
expanded by combining the two switchers for the purpose OUT001 : OUT017 < IN005 - 10000000 | OUT002 : OUT018 < IN006 - 10000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
of expanding numbers of input. ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
When a route is set, the source that is connected to the ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
route destination, is automatically chased out the and the ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
name of the source is displayed. In an example shown ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
below, IN001 of the switcher A is displayed as the source ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
name when OUT017 of the switcher B is selected. ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000 | ....... : ....... < ....... - 00000000
It has another function as follows. When a request of 0=IN 1=OUT 2=SONY 3=VTR 4=SUP 5=CB 6=AIR 7=ME
switching including the expanded destination, is issued, 8=PGM 9=CL A=SL B=L C=RET D=MIX E=JEEP F=OSC
G=L/A H=REM I=CAM J=STDO K=AUX L=COV M=BS N=CS
crosspoint of the route destination side is automatically O=SAT P=CG Q=WETH R=TEST S=HD T=D1- U=D2- V=SEG
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-N:DESCRIP.NAME +:DST+
switched. For example, when IN001-OUT001 of the
switcher A is switched, IN005-OUT017 of the switcher B Example of Setting Screen
is also switched at the same time.
In the setting screen example as shown above, the cross-
IN 1 2 3 4 point of IN005-OUT017 is switched at the same time when
OUT1 a crosspoints including OUT001 (ex. IN002-OUT001) is
OUT2 Expansion input switched. Then, source (IN002) of the switcher-A’s
OUT3
OUT001 is displayed (IN002-OUT017) for OUT017 of the
IN 5 6 7 8 switcher-B. The above described operation is executed by
OUT17 selecting OUT001 and IN002 from the remote control unit.
OUT18
OUT19 However, it is recommended to set the phantom of IN002:
OUT001 < IN002 beforehand on the remote control panel,
Level1 Level1
because the operation of selecting IN002-OUT001 instead
Switcher A Switcher B
of OUT017 looks unnatural when IN002-OUT017 is going
Route Function to be taken.

Setting procedure To add the offset amount to the selected destination, enter
1. Select the menu item [R] of the secondary station. [+] in the DEST column before pressing [Enter].
2. Select the desired item using the cursor key. After “DEST +” is displayed, enter the offset value (0 to
3. Pressing [Enter] establishes the route setting mode. 1023) and press [Enter] to store the value.
When [Enter] is pressed again before entering data,
registration is canceled. Each level can be set by selecting ON (1) or OFF (0).
4. Enter the “Type + No.” name or description name.
(The setting methods remains the same as that of
phantom. Refer to the description of the secondary
station’s menu item [H : SET PHANTOM TABLE].
However, the destination name of the switcher-A to
which source of the switcher-B is connected, should be
input on this menu, instead of the phantom name.)
5. Press [Enter] to confirm the input contents.
6. Pressing [Ctrl] _ [E] switches to the menu screen of
the secondary station.
Pressing [Ctrl] _ [D] returns to the menu screen of the
primary station.
5-36 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
 5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

S : DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME

Purpose n
This menu is used to check the group and names of the In BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210 of version V1.10 and
Description transferred from the primary station. higher, the 160 description names that are transferred from
the primary station can be registered in the range of inputs
Check Procedure 512 x outputs 512 in the order of terminal number regard-
1. When [Enter] or [SPACE] is pressed, the screen will less of the block number. When you want to use more than
be changed to the next page. 160 of the description names, transmit the names from the
2. When [BS] or [DEL] is pressed, the screen will be primary station after dividing the description names into
changed to the previous page. several blocks.
3. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to display the menu screen of the
secondary station. The following operations are possible from the screen.
Press [Ctrl] _ [D] to display the menu screen of the Look at destination from source side : [*] key
primary station. Look at source from destination side : [&] key
Return to the previous page : [(] key
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3206 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 16 Move to the next page : [)] key
GROUP No. = 1
No. Terminal Name Description Name No. Terminal Name Description Name
1 DST- 001 OUT001 London 2 DST- 002 OUT002 NewYork SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3210 V1.10 STATION NUMBER 6
3 SRC- 001 IN001 Berlin 4 SRC- 002 IN002 Moscow SOURCE
5 SRC- 003 IN003 Tokyo 6 SRC- 004 IN004 Cairo name Description name Description
7 SRC- 005 IN005 Berjing 8 SRC- 006 IN006 Madrid 1 IN001 CAM001 2 IN002 CAM002
9 SRC- 007 IN007 Tpronto 10 DST- 005 OUT005 Paris 3 IN003 CAM003 4 IN004 CAM004
11 DST- 008 OUT008 Rome 12 DST- 012 VTR012 OUT012 5 IN005 VTR005 6 IN006 VTR006
13 DST- 013 VTR013 OUT013 14 DST- 014 VTR014 OUT014 7 IN007 VTR007 8 IN008 VTR008
15 DST- 015 VTR015 OUT015 16 DST- 016 SONY016 OUT016 9 IN009 ONAIR01 10 IN010 ONAIR02
17 DST- 017 VTR017 OUT017 18 DST- 018 VTR018 OUT018 11 IN011 ONAIR03 12 IN012 ONAIR04
19 DST- 019 VTR019 OUT019 20 DST- 020 VTR020 OUT020 13 IN013 STADIO1 14 IN014 STADIO2
21 DST- 021 VTR021 OUT021 22 DST- 022 VTR022 OUT022 15 IN015 STADIO3 16 IN016 STADIO4
23 DST- 023 VTR023 OUT023 24 DST- 024 VTR024 OUT024 17 IN017 MONI001 18 IN018 MONI002
25 DST- 025 VTR025 OUT025 26 DST- 026 VTR026 OUT026 19 IN019 IN019 20 IN020 IN020
27 DST- 027 VTR027 OUT027 28 DST- 028 VTR028 OUT028 21 IN021 IN021 22 IN022 IN022
29 DST- 029 VTR029 OUT029 30 DST- 030 VTR030 OUT030 23 IN023 IN023 24 IN024 IN024
31 DST- 031 VTR031 OUT031 32 DST- 032 VTR032 OUT032 25 IN025 IN025 26 IN026 IN026
33 DST- 033 VTR033 OUT033 34 DST- 034 VTR034 OUT034 27 IN027 IN027 28 IN028 IN028
35 DST- 035 VTR035 OUT035 36 DST- 036 VTR036 OUT036 29 IN029 IN029 30 IN030 IN030
37 DST- 037 VTR037 OUT037 38 DST- 038 VTR038 OUT038 31 IN031 IN031 32 IN032 IN032
39 DST- 039 VTR039 OUT039 40 DST- 040 VTR040 OUT040
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Right:DESTINATION Left:SOURCE
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-H:Pg-Up Ctrl-M:Pg-Dn

Example of Setting Screen

Example of Setting Screen

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3210 V1.10 STATION NUMBER 6

DESTINATION
name Description name Description
1 OUT001 DST001 2 OUT002 DST002
3 OUT003 DST003 4 OUT004 DST004
5 OUT005 DST005 6 OUT006 DST006
7 OUT007 DST007 8 OUT008 DST008
9 OUT009 OUT009 10 OUT010 OUT010
11 OUT011 OUT011 12 OUT012 OUT012
13 OUT013 OUT013 14 OUT014 OUT014
15 OUT015 OUT015 16 OUT016 OUT016
17 OUT017 OUT017 18 OUT018 OUT018
19 OUT019 OUT019 20 OUT020 OUT020
21 OUT021 OUT021 22 OUT022 OUT022
23 OUT023 OUT023 24 OUT024 OUT024
25 OUT025 OUT025 26 OUT026 OUT026
27 OUT027 OUT027 28 OUT028 OUT028
29 OUT029 OUT029 30 OUT030 OUT030
31 OUT031 OUT031 32 OUT032 OUT032

Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Right:DESTINATION Left:SOURCE

Example of Setting Screen

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-37

5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL

Purpose n
This menu is used to set channels A and B of REMOTE 2 The same number cannot be set to more than one place. If
(D-sub 9-pin) to loop-through. When the REMOTE 2 the same number is used, the message “* * * is used
control mode is set to DIRECT, this menu is used to set the already; Ignored” will be displayed and the cursor will stop
protocol and the conversion table of the input/output at its current position.
numbers.
There are three kinds of protocols.
SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1
. PRODUCTION SWITCHER PROTOCOL
. AUDIO MIXER PROTOCOL CHANNEL = A REMOTE = CART+ UA2 = 10000000

. CART PROTOCOL SET DESTINATION TRANSCODE( CN NUM.= REMOTE NUM.)
1=001 2=002 3=003 4=004 5=005 6=006 7=007 8=008
9=009 10=010 11=011 12=012 13=013 14=014 15=015 16=016
n 17=017 18=018 19=019 20=020 21=021 22=022 23=023 24=024
25=025 26=026 27=027 28=028 29=029 30=030 31=031 32=032
AUDIO MIXER PROTOCOL was known as “SWITCH- 33=033 34=034 35=035 36=036 37=037 38=038 39=039 40=040
ER PROTOCOL” before. 41=041 42=042 43=043 44=044 45=045 46=046 47=047 48=048
49=049 50=050 51=051 52=052 53=053 54=054 55=055 56=056
57=057 58=058 59=059 60=060 61=061 62=062 63=063 64=064
Set the conversion table of the input/output numbers so SET SOURCE TRANSCODE( CN NUM.= REMOTE NUM.)
1=001 2=002 3=003 4=004 5=005 6=006 7=007 8=008
that the input/output numbers defined by the external 9=009 10=010 11=011 12=012 13=013 14=014 15=015 16=016
controller will correspond to those of the routing switcher. 17=017 18=018 19=019 20=020 21=021 22=022 23=023 24=024
25=025 26=026 27=027 28=028 29=029 30=030 31=031 32=032
In the THROUGH mode, there will be no setting menu for 33=033 34=034 35=035 36=036 37=037 38=038 39=039 40=040
41=041 42=042 43=043 44=044 45=045 46=046 47=047 48=048
channel B. For details of the DIRECT mode, refer to the 49=049 50=050 51=051 52=052 53=053 54=054 55=055 56=056
menu item [U : SELECT CONTROL MODE] in the 57=057 58=058 59=059 60=060 61=061 62=062 63=063 64=064
CAS=065
primary station.
F1:REMOTE F2:DEFAULT F3:DEST. F4:SOURCE Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [U]. Example of Setting Screen
2. “SELECT RS-422 CHANNEL =? (A B) A” will be
displayed. Input A or B using the alphabet keys and Operating Function Keys
press [Enter]. The screen will change to the setting [F1] : REMOTE (To switch the protocol)
screen of the selected channel. 1. When [F1] is pressed, the cursor will move to
“REMOTE”.
SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1 2. When [Enter] is pressed, the protocol will be

SELECT RS-422 CHANNEL ? (A--B) A
switched. To change the “* * *” of “UA2 =”,
select the desired position with the cursor and
press [Enter] to switch 1/0 alternately.
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

3. The cursor will be placed at “1=001” of “SET DESTI- n

NATION TRANSCODE”. The description “* * *” of “UA2 =* * *” on the above
When [Enter] is pressed, “1=” will be displayed and menu corresponds to the DIP switch setting which LSB is
the number can be typed. The left “1” in “1=001” at the left end.
indicates the input/output number of the switcher and
the right “001” indicates the command number [F2] : DEFAULT (Initializing the data)
received. 1. When [F2] is pressed, “DEFAULT ok? (y/n)”
4. Input a number between 1 and 128 and press [Enter] will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
set it. The cursor will move to the next number. 2. When [Y] is pressed, the program will be
If “00” is input, “001” will be displayed. If number executed. When [N] is pressed, it will not be
129 or later is input, the previous number will be executed.
displayed. If [Enter] is pressed without inputting
anything, invalid crosspoints will be set so that the [F3] : DEST
screen will show “ · · · · ”, and the cursor will move to When [F3] is pressed, the cursor will move to the
the next number. When [Ctrl] _ [F] is pressed before destination side.
the setting, the previous number will be displayed and [F4] : SOURCE
the cursor will move to the next number. When [F4] is pressed, the cursor will move to the
source side.
5-38 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
 5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

V : DISPLAY UNIT STATUS Y : DISPLAY TABLE DATA

(Except for HDS-V3232) (Except for HDS-V3232)

Purpose Purpose
This menu is used to display the status of the hardware This menu is used to display the table data set with the
such as boards, etc. control terminal.
n
For the input/output boards and matrix boards of DVS- Operation Procedure
V3232B, channel 1 to 32 will be displayed. And FAN 1 1. Select menu item [Y]. The following message will be
and 2 will be displayed for DVS-V3232B. displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Display: “DISPLAY TABLE DATA? (y/n)”
Operating Procedure 2. Press [Y], and the 4:2:2/4 fsc setting value will be
1. Select menu item [V]. displayed in hexadecimal. Press [A], and the table
2. Press [Ctrl] _ [E]. The menu screen will be dis- data will be displayed in hexadecimal.
played. When [N] is pressed, the table data display will be
cancelled.
DISPLAY UNIT STATUS DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 2 3. When [SPACE] is pressed during the display, the

INPUT BOARD INPUT CONNECTOR BOARD INPUT CASCADE CONNECTOR BOARD display will be interrupted. When [SPACE] is
01-32 REV. 00 01-16 BNC 01-32 VALID
33-64 REV. 00 17-32 BNC 33-64 VALID
pressed once again, the display will begin.
33-48 BNC 4. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to stop the display. The menu
OUTPUT BOARD 49-64 INVALID OUTPUT CASCADE CONNECTOR BOARD
01-32 INVALID 01-32 VALID screen of the secondary station will be displayed.
33-64 REV. 00 OUTPUT CONNECTOR BOARD 33-64 VALID
01-08 BNC
MATRIX BOARD 09-16 CASCADE REFERENCE SIGNAL MISSING DISPLAY TABLE DATA DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 17
01-32(OUT) REV. 00 17-24 CASCADE
33-64(OUT) REV. 00 25-32 BNC SELECT FIELD 0000:49 4E 00 00 00 00 00 00 4F 55 54 00 00 00 00 00 : IN......OUT.....
33-40 CASCADE 0010:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
CONTROL BOARD 41-48 CASCADE POWER SUPPLIES 0020:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
MAIN S-BUS RS422 49-56 CASCADE A ON 0030:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
M V2.10 V2.02 V2.10 57-64 INVALID B INVALID 0040:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
B INVALID 0050:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 FAN4 0060:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
OPTION BOARD CONNECTOR BOARD ROT ROT ROT ROT 0070:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
INVALID VALID 0080:56 49 44 00 00 00 00 00 41 31 00 00 00 00 00 00 : VID.....A1......
0090:41 32 00 00 00 00 00 00 34 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : A2......4.......
00A0:35 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 36 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : 5.......6.......
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU 00B0:37 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 38 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : 7.......8.......
00C0:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
00D0:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 : ................
00E0:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 FF FF 10 00 00 02 : ................
Example of Display
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Example of Display

n
For the details of the table data, refer to the S-BUS Proto-
col Manual.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-39

5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

Y : SET DISPLAY MODES (BKS-R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621)

Purpose Setting Procedure

This menu is used to set the display mode. 1. Select the menu item [Y].
The setting contents are as follows. 2. The cursor appears in “DISPLAY MODES = 1”.
Move the cursor to an arbitrary mode and press
DISPLAY MODES (BKS-R3216/R3220): [Enter] establishes the input mode.
Selects the display type. (when J : NAME STYLE 3. Enter the desired number with the numeric keys.
(DESCRIP.NAME) is selected in the primary station Press [Enter] to set the number ; the cursor moves to
menu.) the next setting item.
NORMAL = Normal display If you do not want to change the default value, press
2 + 2CHAR = Displays two letters before and after the [Enter] without entering any number.
name. 4. To set “TALLY GROUP”, move the cursor to the
4CHAR = Displays four letters from the beginning position of the desired tally (in the case of tally 2,
of the name. second “_” from the left) and press [Enter]. The item
is toggled on and off every time [Enter] is pressed.
n (When the number is displayed, the item is ON. When
If 2 : 2 + 2CHAR or 3 : 4CHAR is selected when J : “_” is displayed, the item is OFF.)
NAME STYLE (Type + Num) is selected in the primary
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3220 V1.03Å STATION NUMBER 2
station menu, the two letters and two numbers of the type SET DISPLAY MODES

name are displayed. DISPLAY MODES = 1 1:NORMAL 2:2+2CHAR 3:4CHAR *:UNRELATED
PANEL FUNCTION = * 1:NORMAL 2:4 DESTINATION *:UNRELATED
TALLY GROUP = 1---
PANEL FUNCTION (BKS-R1617/R1618/R3219/R1621):

Sets the operation mode of the panel.
NORMAL = Normal selection mode

4 DESTINATION = Destinations can be set for each

block of the source button that

consists of four blocks.
Set each source button and also set

the destination of each block using

the menu item [N : SET PANEL
TABLE].

Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN

TALLY GROUP
Selects the tally group. Example of Setting Screen

5-40 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

Z : SELECT SDI FORMAT

(Except for HDS-V3232)

Purpose Operating Function Keys

This menu is used to set the format of signals fed to the [F1] : FORMAT (Mode which sets the signal format by 8-
input/output board of DVS-V3232B and DVS-V6464B channels)
with the control terminal. [F2] : FIELD (Mode which sets the crosspoint switching
This setting is available when the manual switch for the field)
format on each input/output board is OFF. 1. Press [F2]. The cursor will move to “SWITCH
ING FIELD” in the menu.
Setting Procedure 2. Press [Enter]. The setting will change.
1. Select menu item [Z]. (ODD → EVEN → FIELD → ASYNC → ODD)
2. Select a channel line using the cursor to be set. (The All switching field in the switcher are deter
channels will be switched by eight channels. mined by this setting.
Displayed signal formats that are enclosed by the
round brackets as “(4:2:2)” have been set on the board n
and cannot be modified with the control terminal. To use RS-422A and S-BUS together, set the switching
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the setting will change field as follows.
(“4:2:2” → “4 fsc NTSC” → “4 fsc PAL”). 1 When using the S-BUS and CART protocol together :
4. Press [S] (Table Set), and the content now appeared is ODD
copied to the area of SDI FORMAT TABLE. 2 When using the S-BUS and PRODUCTION
5. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to stop the display and the menu SWITCHER protocol together : FIELD
screen of the secondary station will be displayed.
Note that the switching timing of the CART will not be
SELECT SDI FORMAT DVS-V6464B V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1 accurate if the CART and PRODUCTION SWITCHERS

DESTINATION UNIT SOURCE UNIT protocols are used together.

01 - 08 : 4:2:2 01 - 08 : 4:2:2
Switching timing is not guaranteed in the combination of
09 - 16 : 4fsc NTSC 09 - 16 : 4:2:2 different switching fields.
17 - 24 : 4fsc PAL 17 - 24 : 4:2:2
25 - 32 : 4:2:2 25 - 32 : 4:2:2 For details of the signal switching timing, refer to “5-8.
33 - 40 : 4:2:2 33 - 40 : 4:2:2
41 - 48 : 4:2:2 41 - 48 : 4:2:2
Signal Switching Timing”.
49 - 56 :( 4:2:2 ) 49 - 56 :( 4:2:2 )
57 - 64 : 4:2:2 57 - 64 : 4:2:2


SWITCHING FIELD FIELD


F1:FORMAT F2:FIELD S:Table Set Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Example of Setting Screen

n
Unless pressing [S], the data will be deleted when the
power is turned off.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-41

5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

Z : SET PANEL STATUS (BKS-R3204/R3205/R3206)

Purpose 5. When “PANEL MODE=3” (the DAUGHTER) is

Besides the remote control unit can be used alone, several selected on BKS-R3204, the MOTHER ID number is
units can be used together as if it were one unit with displayed as “MOTHER STATION ID= xx”. The
expanded sources and destinations. When using several MOTHER ID number is set using the switch on the
units together, one will serve as the mother and the rest rear panel. If switch setting is 0, 1, 255, “Incorrect ID
will serve as the daughters. (0, 1, 255) is designated.” is displayed, while “The
This menu is used to perform the settings necessary in such designated ID is not found” is displayed if the mother
cases. The selection of stand alone use, mother use, and station ID is not registered in the block.
daughter use is performed in this menu in addition to the 6. In setting of BKS-R3206 different from BKS-R3204/
assignment of buttons on the front panel. If assigned as the R3205, there is no “SELECT SOURCE OR DESTI-
mother station, a block number should be set. (up to 10 NATION ASSIGNMENT”, Use either “Type name +
mothers can be registered.) Number” or “the source direct” to designate the source
name.
Setting Procedure “PANEL LAYOUT= x” is displayed. Press [Enter]
1. Select menu item [Z]. and input the numbers.
2. Place the cursor on “PANEL MODE=1” and press 7. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to display to the menu screen of the
[Enter] to select an item. Selection should be per- secondary station.
formed using the following keys. Press [Ctrl] _ [D] to display to the menu screen of the
BKS-R3204 : 1. STAND ALONE 2. MOTHER primary station.
3. DAUGHTER
BKS-R3205 : 1. STAND ALONE 2. MOTHER n
BKS-R3206 : 1. STAND ALONE 2. MOTHER When “PANEL MODE=1” (the STAND ALONE) is
If selection is not necessary, press [Enter] again. selected on BKS-R3204 and BKS-R3205, all KEYs (1 to
3. Place the cursor on “KEY 1-8=S” and press [Enter] to 32) can not be assigned as DESTINATION. If all is set as
set S or D. The button number is set in order from top DESTINATION, the KEYs 1 to 8 are set to “KEYs 1 to
left to right, then left bottom to right as shown below. 8=S” automatically.

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3204 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SET PANEL STATUS
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
PANEL MODE = 1
1:STAND ALONE 2:MOTHER 3:DAUGHTER
To change to the next setting, press [Enter].
SET SOURCE OR DESTINATION ASSIGNMENT
KEY 1- 8 = S KEY 9-16 = S
KEY 17-24 = S KEY 25-32 = S
4. When “PANEL MODE=2” (the MOTHER) is select- S:SOURCE D:DESTINATION
ed, move the cursor to “SET BLOCK NUMBER=X”

and press [Enter] to enter block number. When

MOTHER STATION ID=12(BKS-R3206)
MOTHER STATION BLOCK LIST

[Enter] is pressed again, the block number will be set. BLOCK 1 = STATION 12 | BLOCK 6
BLOCK 2 = STATION 5 | BLOCK 7
=
=
.......
.......
If the mother station is set, the ID are displayed. BLOCK 3 = STATION 2 | BLOCK 8 = .......
BLOCK 4 = STATION 3 | BLOCK 9 = .......
BLOCK 5 = ....... | BLOCK10 = .......

Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN

Example of Setting Screen (BKS-R3204)

5-42 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

Z : SET PANEL STATUS (BKS-R1607/R1608/

R3209/R3210/R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3205 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 11
R3220/R1621)
SET PANEL STATUS

PANEL MODE = 1 Purpose
1:STAND ALONE 2:MOTHER

This is the function to set the various modes of the remote
SET SOURCE OR DESTINATION ASSIGNMENT control unit. In the models corresponding this menu as
KEY 1- 8 = S KEY 9-16 = S
KEY 17-24 = S KEY 25-32 = S shown above the multiple units can be connected in order
S:SOURCE D:DESTINATION to expand the number of sources and destinations which

SET BLOCK NUMBER=3 can be controlled simultaneously. Setting the mother panel
MOTHER STATION BLOCK LIST
BLOCK 1 = STATION 11 | BLOCK 6 = .......
and the daughter panels is performed from this menu.
BLOCK 2 = STATION 5 | BLOCK 7 = ....... (Maximum ten mother panels can be set.)
BLOCK 3 = STATION 2 | BLOCK 8 = .......
BLOCK 4 = STATION 3 | BLOCK 9 = ....... Contents to be set are shown below.
BLOCK 5 = ....... | BLOCK10 = .......

Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN DISPLAY MODE
STATUS = Indicates the status of the primary station’s
Example of Setting Screen (BKS-R3205) crosspoint table.
PROMPT = The depressed button lit immediately.

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3206 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 2

SET PANEL STATUS PROTECT MODE
ON AIR = Switching is performed from that panel even
PANEL MODE = 2
1:STAND ALONE 2:MOTHER after protected.

PANEL LAYOUT = 2
NORMAL = Switching is prohibited after protected.
1: KEY + NUMBER SELECT MODE FLEXIBLE = Switching is prohibited after protected.
2: SOURCE DIRECT SELECT MODE
However, protections by other stations can
SET BLOCK NUMBER = 2 be released.*1
MOTHER STATION BLOCK LIST
BLOCK 1 = STATION 11 | BLOCK 6 = ....... FLEX & OA =Uses the functions of both 1 : ON AIR
BLOCK 2 = STATION 5
BLOCK 3 = STATION 2
| BLOCK 7
| BLOCK 8
=
=
.......
.......
and 3 : FLEXIBLE. *1
BLOCK 4 = STATION 3 | BLOCK 9 = .......
BLOCK 5 = ....... | BLOCK10 = .......

Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN PHANTOM PROTECT
PART PROT = The phantoms that are not protected are
Example of Setting Screen (BKS-R3206) switched.
FULL PROT = All phantoms cannot be switched when
even one phantom on which protect is
set to on, is included.
BUTTON LINK = All phantoms cannot be switched
when the protect button is set to on.

PANEL MODE
STAND ALONE = Stand alone panel
MOTHER = Mother panel
DAUGHTER = Daughter panel

PANEL LAYOUT*2
TYPE + NUM. = Selection of X-Y
DIRECT = Direct selection*3
BPS = Source button selection*1
KEYPAD = Description selection*1
(Only BKS-R3216 is valid.)

*1 : It is only applicable to BKS-R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621.

*2 : It is only applicable to BKS-R3210/R3216.
*3 : BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210
ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-43
5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

LEVEL MODE*1 Setting Procedure

SINGLE = Single level selection 1. Select the menu item [Z].
MULTI = Multiple level selection 2. The cursor appears in “DISPLAY MODE = 1”.
Move the cursor to an arbitrary mode and press
DEST SELECTION*2 [Enter] establishes the input mode.
DISABLE = Change of destination from the panel is 3. Enter a number to select using the ten-keys.
prohibited. When [Enter] is pressed to confirm the input number,
ENABLE = Change of destination from the panel is the cursor moves to the next setting item.
allowed. When you do not want to change the default value, do
not input any number, but press [Enter].
ILLUMINATION LEVEL*3
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3220 V1.03 STATION NUMBER 2
Brightness of the button indicator : 1 (dark) to 8 (bright) SET PANEL STATUS

DISPLAY MODE = 1 1:STATUS 2:PROMPT
*3
MONITOR DESTINATION PROTECT MODE = 2 1:ON AIR 2:NORMAL 3:FLEXIBLE 4:FLEX & OA
PHANTOM PROTECT = 1 1:PART PROT 2:FULL PROT 3:BUTTON LINK
Enter the name of the destination to be monitored (when PANEL MODE = 1 1:STAND ALONE 2:MOTHER 3:DAUGHTER
PANEL LAYOUT = 1 1:TYPE + NUM. 2:BPS 3:KEYPAD *:UNRELATED
the MONI button is selected). LEVEL MODE = 1 1:SINGLE 2:MULTI *:UNRELATED
DEST SELECTION = * 1:DISABLE 2:ENABLE *:UNRELATED
ILLUMINATION LEVEL = 8 1-8:MIN-MAX
SOURCE OFFSET*3 MONITOR DESTINATION = .......
SOURCE OFFSET = 0000
0 = Use the same source as the destination to be monitored. CONTROL LEVELS = --------
1 to 1023 = Use the source at the specified offset.
BLOCK & MOTHER STATION LIST
BLOCK 1 = ....... | BLOCK 6 = .......
BLOCK 2 = ....... | BLOCK 7 = .......
CONTROL LEVELS*3 BLOCK 3 = ....... | BLOCK 8 = .......
When you want to select any specific level from remote BLOCK 4 = ....... | BLOCK 9 = .......
BLOCK 5 = ....... | BLOCK10 = .......
control unit, move the cursor to the desired level and

press [Enter]. (When you want to select level-3, move

Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN
the cursor to the third “_” position and press [Enter].)

“_” = : Level selection will not be performed. Example of Setting Screen

Other than “_” : A signal will be switched at the level.
When all indications show “_”, a signal is switched at 4. Set the respective items in the same way as the steps 2
the level which is set by the primary station. and 3.
However, set “PANEL MODE” (setting the mother
*1 : It is only applicable to BKS-R3210/R3216. and daughters panels) as follows.
*2 : It is only applicable to BKS-R1607/R1617.
*3 : It is only applicable to BKS-R3216/R1617/R1618/R3219/R3220/R1621.

5-44 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

Mother panel : n
1) Select “PANEL MODE = 2” (mother machine). Checksum can be displayed from version V1.10 of the
2) Press [Enter]. BKS series.
The following contents are displayed on the setting screen. Use checksum to check if the program data is correct,
in addition to the version number indication. (The
SET BLOCK NUMBER = *
MOTHER STATION BLOCK LIST PGM CHECKSUM is mainly used.)
BLOCK 1 = ....... | BLOCK 6 = .......
BLOCK 2 = ....... | BLOCK 7 = .......
The following three types of checksum are available.
BLOCK 3 = ....... | BLOCK 8 = .......
BLOCK 4 = ....... | BLOCK 9 = .......
BLOCK 5 = ....... | BLOCK10 = ....... BOOT CHECKSUM=D039
Checksum of the program area that is used for starting
3) Input the unused BLOCK number of the BLOCK &
up the ROM.
MOTHER STATION LIST into the “*” column.
PGM CHECKSUM=630F
4) Press [Enter] to confirm the input contents.
Check of the area in which the actual programs are
stored.
Daughter panel :
ROM CHECKSUM=FF68
1) Select “PANEL MODE = 3” (daughter panel).
Checksum of the entire ROM.
2) Press [Enter].
The following contents are displayed on the setting screen. SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3210 V1.10 STATION NUMBER 6
SET PANEL STATUS
DISPLAY MODE = 1 1:STATUS 2:PROMPT
MOTHER STATION ID = ** (The designated ID is not found)
PROTECT MODE = 2 1:ON AIR 2:NORMAL
MOTHER STATION BLOCK LIST
PHANTOM PROTECT = 1 1:PART PROT 2:FULL PROT 3:BUTTON LINK
BLOCK 1 = STATION 6 | BLOCK 6 = .......
PANEL MODE = 1 1:STAND ALONE 2:MOTHER 3:DAUGHTER
BLOCK 2 = ....... | BLOCK 7 = .......
PANEL LAYOUT = 2 1:TYPE + NUM. 2:DIRECT *:UNRELATED
BLOCK 3 = ....... | BLOCK 8 = .......
LEVEL MODE = 1 1:SINGLE 2:MULTI *:UNRELATED
BLOCK 4 = ....... | BLOCK 9 = .......
DEST SELECTION = * 1:DISABLE 2:ENABLE *:UNRELATED
BLOCK 5 = ....... | BLOCK10 = .......


BLOCK & MOTHER STATION LIST
BLOCK 1 = ....... | BLOCK 6 = .......
3) Input the mother’s STATION ID number of the BLOCK 2 = ....... | BLOCK 7 = .......
BLOCK 3 = ....... | BLOCK 8 = .......
BLOCK & MOTHER STATION LIST into the “**” BLOCK 4 = ....... | BLOCK 9 = .......
column. BLOCK 5 = ....... | BLOCK10 = .......

4) Press [Enter].
BOOT CHECKSUM=D039 PGM CHECKSUM=630F ROM CHECKSUM=FF68

Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN
When the ID number is input correctly, model name of
the mother panel appears as shown below.
Example of Setting Screen
MOTHER STATION ID = 6 (BKS-R1607)

5. Pressing [Ctrl] _ [E] switches to the menu display of

the secondary station.
Pressing [Ctrl] _ [D] returns to the menu display of
the primary station.

m
1. Various modes must be set individually on the units on
which mother panel and daughter panels are set.
2. Set the mother panel first when setting the mother
panel and daughter panel.
3. Setting of the mother panel and daughter panel is not
completed when the “PANEL MODE” setting alone is
performed.
Be sure to set the block numbers of mother panel and
to set the STATION ID (MOTHER ID) of the daugh-
ter panel side.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-45

5-2. Setting Items of the Secondary Station

Z : SELECT CONNECTION (DVS-RS1616 only) Z : SWITCHING FIELD (HDS-V3232 only)

Purpose Purpose
As for DVS-RS1616, this menu is used to set, “M” This menu is used to set the crosspoint switching field of
(controlling side) or “S” (controlled side) for each 9-pin HDS-V3232 with the control terminal.
connector from 1 to 32.
If a controller is connected to a 9-pin connector, set to (S). Setting Procedure
If a controlled device is connected to a 9-pin connector, set 1. Select the menu item [Z].
to (M). 2. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to stop the display and the menu
When setting to (S), termination is automatically made. screen of the secondary station will be displayed.

DVS-RS1616 SWITCHING FIELD HDS-V3232 V2.10 STATION NUMBER 1

EDITOR, VTR,
(S) (M)
etc (M) etc (S)



Setting Procedure
1. Select the menu item [Z].
2. Select a input/output number using the cursor.

3. Press [Enter], the setting status changes.

(“M” → “S” → “M”) SWITCHING FIELD FIELD

4. Press [S] (TABLE SET), the content now appeared is

copied to the table data. F2:FIELD S:Table Set Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

5. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to stop the display and the menu

screen of the secondary station will be displayed. Example of Setting Screen

SELECT CONNECTION DVS-RS1616 V3.01 STATION NUMBER 5

n
OUTPUT (INPUT) INPUT Unless pressing [S], the data will be deleted when the

TERMINAL:DIRECTION TERMINAL:DIRECTION TERMINAL:DIRECTION TERMINAL:DIRECTION power is turned off.

01(17): M 09(25): M 01 : S 09 : S
02(18): M 10(26): M 02 : S 10 : S Operating Function Key
[F2] : FIELD (Mode which sets the crosspoint switching
03(19): M 11(27): M 03 : S 11 : S
: :
: : field)
08(24):
M 16(32): M 08 : S 16 : S
1. Press [F2]. The cursor will move to “SWITCH
S:TABLE SET

ING FIELD” in the menu.
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU 2. Press [Enter]. The setting will change.
Example of Setting Screen
(ODD → EVEN → FIELD → ASYNC → ODD)
All switching field in the switcher are deter
n mined by this setting.
Unless pressing [S], the setting will be ignore.
n
To use RS-422A and S-BUS together, set the switching
field as follows.
1 When using the S-BUS and CART protocol together :
ODD
2 When using the S-BUS and PRODUCTION
SWITCHER protocol together : FIELD

Note that the switching timing of the CART will not be

accurate if the CART and PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
protocols are used together.
Switching timing is not guaranteed in the combination of
different switching fields.
For details of the signal switching timing, refer to “5-8.
Signal Switching Timing”.
5-46 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
 5-3. Setting Items of the Primary Station on Monitor S-BUS (BKDS-V3292B only)

5-3. Setting Items of the Primary Station F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER
on Monitor S-BUS (BKDS-V3292B
only) Purpose
This menu is used to enable the units connected to the data
Used for setting the units on the monitor S-BUS. link of the monitor S-BUS to communicate.

SET MONITOR FUNCTION DVS-V6464B Monitor Bus I/F V2.10 Setting Procedure

MODIFICATION COMMAND 1. Select menu item [F].
2. Select the secondary station using the cursor whose
F: SET SCTIVE UNIT NUMBER
communication will be valid.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the setting displayed will
M: SELECT MONITOR FUNCTION (COMBINED)



R: CALL SECONDARY STATION
change “E” → “Blank” → “E”. Only the secondary
Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU stations displayed with “E” are valid. (“M” indicates
the primary station.)
Menu Screen of the Primary Station on Monitor S-BUS 4. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the menu screen of the
primary station on the monitor S-BUS will be dis-
Setting Procedure of Monitor Function played.
1. Select the menu item [R] of the primary station in
order to call the menu screen of the secondary station n
set as the primary station on the monitor S-BUS. As the response will become slower if there are many
2. Select the menu item [M] to call the menu screen of secondary stations, make the secondary stations not
the primary station on the monitor S-BUS. connected invalid.
3. Set the menu item [F] and [M]. “*” indicates out of the control area.
4. Select the menu item [R] to call the secondary station
on the monitor S-BUS. ENABLE ACTIVE UNIT FOR STATION NUMBER DVS-V6464B Monitor Bus I/F V2.10

5. Set each menu item on the screen. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112131415 1617181920
6. Press [Ctrl] _ [Z] to return to the menu screen of the 001-020
+
M E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E
primary station on the monitor S-BUS. 021-040 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E
041-060 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E
7. Set each item of all secondary stations, repeating the 061-080 E E E E E
081-100
procedure of step 4 to 6. 101-120
8. Press [Ctrl] _ [D] to return to the menu screen of the 121-140
141-160
primary station on the standard S-BUS. 161-180
181-200
201-220
n 221-240
241-254 Å * * * * * *
If there are multiple monitor S-BUS data links, repeat the
CTRL-E:RETURN TO MENU
procedure of step 1 to 8 for each link.

Example of Setting Screen

m
1. Station ID of the primary station is always 1 regardless
of the DIP switch setting on the CPU board.
2. Station ID of the secondary station is deter mined with
the DIP switch setting. Do not assign the same
number on two or more units as station ID on both
standard S-BUS and monitor S-BUS.
Number that can be registered as secondary s station
ID are 2 to 254.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-47

5-3. Setting Items of the Primary Station on Monitor S-BUS (BKDS-V3292B only)

M: SELECT MONITOR FUNCTION R : CALL SECONDARY STATION

Purpose Purpose
This menu is for setting the connection to use the input This menu is used to call the secondary station on the
monitor and output monitor in series or independently. monitor S-BUS.
To monitor the input and output monitor lines using
separate monitors, set the SEPARATED mode. To Setting Procedure
monitor them together on one monitor, set the COM- 1. Select menu item [R].
BINED mode. 2. Enter the station number using the numerical keys, and
press [Enter] to call it.
Setting Procedure 3. The menu screen of the secondary station on the
1. Select menu item [M]. monitor S-BUS will be displayed.
The following appears.
COMBINED : series connection
SEPARATED : independent use
2. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to display the menu screen of the
primary station on the monitor S-BUS.

5-48 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-4. Setting Items of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS (BKDS-V3293B only)

5-4. Setting Items of the Secondary L : COPY TABLE DATA <MONITOR MENU>
Station on Monitor S-BUS
(BKDS-V3293B only) Purpose
This menu is used to copy the setting contents of the
M: SET AVAILABLE MONITOR LINE remote control unit. This is applied to BKS-R3204 and
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B + BKDS-R3292B) BKS-R3205.

SET MONITOR FUNCTION DVS-V6464B Monitor Bus I/F V2.10 STATION NUMBER 23 Setting Procedure

MODIFICATION COMMAND
1. Select menu item [L]. This item can be selected from
both the menu and another setting screen.
M: SET AVAILABLE MONITOR LINE INPUT=( ENABLE )OUTPUT=( ENABLE )
2. The message “Station Number?” will be displayed.

Ctrl-Z:RETURN
Enter the station number to be copied.
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the table data will be copied
Menu Screen of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS and the screen will return to the setting screen.
(DVS-V3232B/V6464B) When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed again, the menu screen
of the secondary station on the monitor S-BUS will be
Purpose displayed.
This menu is used to set the input monitor and output 4. When [Ctrl] _ [Z] is pressed, menu screen of the
monitor to valid or invalid. primary station on the monitor S-BUS will be dis-
played.
Setting Procedure
1. Select menu item [M]. MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU. BKS-R3204 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 6
2. Select the source/destination using the cursor, and

press [Enter] to change the setting. (“ENABLE” →

“DISABLE” → “ENABLE”)
Station Number ?
3. Press [Ctrl] _ [Z] to display the menu screen of the
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-Z:RETURN
primary station on the monitor S-BUS.
Input Monitor Input Monitor
Example of Setting Screen
128 65 64 1
1 Data set on the menu item [N : SET PANEL TABLE] are
E E
copied.
D Cascade E Output
Monitor

DVS-V6464B DVS-V6464B
64
Cascade Cascade

65
D

Cascade
E Output
Monitor
DVS-V6464B DVS-V6464B
128

E : Enable
D : Disable
n
Be sure to set the monitor line to “DISABLE” in cascade
connection.
If set to “ENABLE”, the monitor may not be performed
properly.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-49

5-4. Setting Items of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS (BKDS-V3293B only)

N : SET PANEL TABLE (BKS-R1607/R1608/R3204/R3205/R3209/R3210) <MONITOR MENU>

Purpose
This menu is used to assign source/destination name to MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R1607 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 3
SET PANEL TABLE(SOURCE) CONTROL DESTINATION = OUT001
each source/destination selection button. 01 KEY=IN001 02 KEY=IN002 03 KEY=IN003 04 KEY=IN004
05 KEY=IN005 06 KEY=IN006 07 KEY=IN007 08 KEY=IN008
In the monitor mode, the button color of the remote control 09 KEY=....... 10 KEY=....... 11 KEY=....... 12 KEY=.......
unit will be green for both source and destination. 13 KEY=....... 14 KEY=....... 15 KEY=....... 16 KEY=.......
17 KEY=IN009 18 KEY=IN010 19 KEY=IN011 20 KEY=IN012
21 KEY=IN013 22 KEY=IN014 23 KEY=IN015 24 KEY=IN016
25 KEY=....... 26 KEY=....... 27 KEY=....... 28 KEY=.......
Setting Procedure 29 KEY=....... 30 KEY=....... 31 KEY=....... 32 KEY=.......
1. Select menu item [N].
SET PANEL TABLE(DESTINATION)
2. Select a button number using the cursor. 01 KEY=....... 02 KEY=....... 03 KEY=....... 04 KEY=.......

3. When [Enter] is pressed, the name can be typed.

05 KEY=....... 06 KEY=....... 07 KEY=....... 08 KEY=.......
09 KEY=OUT001 10 KEY=OUT002 11 KEY=OUT003 12 KEY=OUT004
To delete the registration, press [Enter] before 13 KEY=OUT005 14 KEY=OUT006 15 KEY=OUT007 16 KEY=OUT008
17 KEY=....... 18 KEY=....... 19 KEY=....... 20 KEY=.......
inputting the name. 21 KEY=....... 22 KEY=....... 23 KEY=....... 24 KEY=.......
25 KEY=OUT009 26 KEY=OUT010 27 KEY=OUT011 28 KEY=OUT012
4. a) When [J : NAME STYLE (Type + Num)] is 29 KEY=OUT013 30 KEY=OUT014 31 KEY=OUT015 32 KEY=OUT016

selected in the primary station menu, input the 0=IN 1=OUT 2=.... 3=.... 4=.... 5=.... 6=.... 7=....
type name (between 0 and F) and the number for 8=.... 9=.... A=.... B=.... C=.... D=.... E=.... F=....

the source and destination. Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-N:Type + Num
b) Each time [Ctrl] _ [N] is pressed when [J :
NAME STYLE (DESCRIP. NAME)] is selected Example of Setting Screen
in the primary station menu, the following input
modes will be switched alternately. m
1. Set the table data of BKS-R3204/R3205/R3206 by
Description name input mode : eight buttons previously in the menu item [Z : SET
When “Ctrl N: Type + Num” is displayed on the ____ PANEL STATUS]. If “KEY = ____” is
screen, it means that the name mode will be changed displayed on the key number position, the name can
to “Type + Number” by pressing [Ctrl] _ [N]. not be input.
Inputs the Description name from the first to seventh 2. Be sure to set either source or destination on the
characters with alphabet and numerical keys. respective buttons (keys) when setting the BKS-
“Type + Number” name input mode : R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210.
Same as a) If both source and destination are set to the same
button (key), it will cause malfunction.
n 3. When setting description names to the source/destina-
If the Description name has been set for the input/output tion buttons, select a name from the description name
number the display of Description has priority to the group sent to the remote control unit.
display of “Type + Number” even if the “Type + Number” If other names are input, these will not be set even if
name is input. the [Enter] button is pressed.
In such cases, transfer the group including the desired
5. When [Enter] is pressed, the source name is set. description name from the primary station.
6. When [Ctrl] _ [E] is pressed, the screen will return to
the menu screen of the secondary station on the
monitor S-BUS.
When [Ctrl] _ [Z] is pressed, the screen will return to
the menu screen of the primary station on the monitor
S-BUS.
When [Ctrl] _ [D] is pressed, the screen will return to
the menu screen of the primary station on the standard
S-BUS.

5-50 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-4. Setting Items of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS (BKDS-V3293B only)

S : DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME

<MONITOR MENU>
n
In BKS-R1607 of version V1.10 and higher, any Purpose
desired button among the sixteen buttons can be set as Check the groups and their names of the description names
a TAKE button. that are transferred from the primary station.
When this setting is performed, the name selected by
the SELECTOR knob on the front panel can be taken Check Procedure
by pressing the TAKE button. 1. Press either [Enter] or [SPACE] to view the next
(Maximum inputs 512 x outputs 512) page.
2. Press either [BS] or [DEL] to view the previous page.
The actual setting procedure is as follows. Select a 3. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to return to the menu screen of the
key from the source side which you want to use as the secondary station.
TAKE button. Press the [T] button. Press [Ctrl] _ [D] to return to the menu screen of the
primary station.
SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R1607 V1.10 STATION NUMBER 12
SET PANEL TABLE(SOURCE) CONTROL DESTINATION = OUT244
MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3206 V3.10 STATION NUMBER 16
01 KEY=SRC004 02 KEY=SRC005 03 KEY=SRC006 04 KEY=SRC001
GROUP No. = 1
05 KEY=SRC002 06 KEY=SRC003 07 KEY=SRC007 08 KEY=SRC008 No. Terminal Name Description Name No. Terminal Name Description Name
09 KEY=SRC009 10 KEY=SRC010 11 KEY=SRC013 12 KEY=SRC014 1 DST- 001 OUT001 London 2 DST- 002 OUT002 NewYork
13 KEY=....... 14 KEY=....... 15 KEY=....... 16 KEY=TAKE 3 SRC- 001 IN001 Berlin 4 SRC- 002 IN002 Moscow
5 SRC- 003 IN003 Tokyo 6 SRC- 004 IN004 Cairo
SET PANEL TABLE(DESTINATION) 7 SRC- 005 IN005 Berjing 8 SRC- 006 IN006 Madrid
01 KEY=....... 02 KEY=....... 03 KEY=....... 04 KEY=....... 9 SRC- 007 IN007 Tpronto 10 DST- 005 OUT005 Paris
05 KEY=....... 06 KEY=....... 07 KEY=....... 08 KEY=....... 11 DST- 008 OUT008 Rome 12 DST- 012 VTR012 OUT012
09 KEY=....... 10 KEY=....... 11 KEY=....... 12 KEY=....... 13 DST- 013 VTR013 OUT013 14 DST- 014 VTR014 OUT014
13 KEY=OUT001 14 KEY=OUT012 15 KEY=OUT003 16 KEY=....... 15 DST- 015 VTR015 OUT015 16 DST- 016 SONY016 OUT016
17 DST- 017 VTR017 OUT017 18 DST- 018 VTR018 OUT018
0=SRC 1=OUT 2=2 3=3 4=4 5=5 6=6 7=7 19 DST- 019 VTR019 OUT019 20 DST- 020 VTR020 OUT020
8=8 9=9 A=A B=B C=C D=D E=E F=F 21 DST- 021 VTR021 OUT021 22 DST- 022 VTR022 OUT022
23 DST- 023 VTR023 OUT023 24 DST- 024 VTR024 OUT024
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-N:DESCRIP.NAME T:TAKE 25 DST- 025 VTR025 OUT025 26 DST- 026 VTR026 OUT026
27 DST- 027 VTR027 OUT027 28 DST- 028 VTR028 OUT028
29 DST- 029 VTR029 OUT029 30 DST- 030 VTR030 OUT030
Example of Setting Screen 31 DST- 031 VTR031 OUT031 32 DST- 032 VTR032 OUT032
33 DST- 033 VTR033 OUT033 34 DST- 034 VTR034 OUT034
35 DST- 035 VTR035 OUT035 36 DST- 036 VTR036 OUT036
37 DST- 037 VTR037 OUT037 38 DST- 038 VTR038 OUT038
39 DST- 039 VTR039 OUT039 40 DST- 040 VTR040 OUT040

Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Ctrl-H:Pg-Up Ctrl-M:Pg-Dn

Example of Setting Screen

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-51

5-4. Setting Items of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS (BKDS-V3293B only)

Z : SET PANEL STATUS (BKS-R1607/R1608/

R3204/R3205/R3209/R3210)
n <MONITOR MENU>
In BKS-R1607/R1608/R3209/R3210 of version V1.10 and Purpose
higher, the 160 description names that are transferred from Set the various modes of the remote control unit.
the primary station can be registered in the range of inputs Number of sources and destinations that can be controlled
512 x outputs 512 in the order of terminal number regard- from the remote control unit, can be expanded by connect-
less of the block number. When you want to use more than ing multiple mother and daughter panels. Setting the
160 of the description names, transmit the names from the mother and daughter panels are also performed using this
primary station after dividing the description names into menu. (Ten mother panels can be registered at the maxi-
several blocks. mum.)

The following operations are possible from the screen. The setting contents are as follows.
Look at destination from source side : [*] key
Look at source from destination side : [&] key DISPLAY MODE
Return to the previous page : [(] key STATUS= Displays the status of the primary station
Move to the next page : [)] key crosspoint table.
PROMPT= The pressed buttons lit immediately.
MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3210 V1.10 STATION NUMBER 6
SOURCE
name Description name Description
PROTECT MODE
1 IN001 CAM001 2 IN002 CAM002 ON AIR= Execute switching from the panel even during
3 IN003 CAM003 4 IN004 CAM004
5 IN005 VTR005 6 IN006 VTR006
the protect mode.
7 IN007 VTR007 8 IN008 VTR008 NORMAL= Switching is not possible during the protect
9 IN009 ONAIR01 10 IN010 ONAIR02
11 IN011 ONAIR03 12 IN012 ONAIR04
mode.
13 IN013 STADIO1 14 IN014 STADIO2
15 IN015 STADIO3 16 IN016 STADIO4
17 IN017 MONI001 18 IN018 MONI002
PHANTOM PROTECT
19 IN019 IN019 20 IN020 IN020 PART PROT= Execute switching on the phantom on
21 IN021 IN021 22 IN022 IN022
23 IN023 IN023 24 IN024 IN024
which protect is not set.
25 IN025 IN025 26 IN026 IN026 FULL PROT=Switching is not executed on all phantoms
27 IN027 IN027 28 IN028 IN028
29 IN029 IN029 30 IN030 IN030
when any of the phantom is set to PRO-
31 IN031 IN031 32 IN032 IN032 TECT ON.

Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Right:DESTINATION Left:SOURCE
BUTTON LINK= Switching is not executed on all
phantoms when the PROTECT button
on the panel is set to ON.
Example of Setting Screen

PANEL MODE*3
STAND ALONE= Stand alone panel
MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3210 V1.10 STATION NUMBER 6
DESTINATION MOTHER= Mother panel
name Description name Description DAUGHTER= Daughter panel
1 OUT001 DST001 2 OUT002 DST002
3 OUT003 DST003 4 OUT004 DST004
5 OUT005 DST005 6 OUT006 DST006 PANEL LAYOUT*1
7 OUT007 DST007 8 OUT008 DST008
9 OUT009 OUT009 10 OUT010 OUT010 TYPE + NUM.= Selecting X-Y
11 OUT011 OUT011 12 OUT012 OUT012 DIRECT= Selecting direct
13 OUT013 OUT013 14 OUT014 OUT014
15 OUT015 OUT015 16 OUT016 OUT016
17 OUT017 OUT017 18 OUT018 OUT018 LEVEL MODE*1
19 OUT019 OUT019 20 OUT020 OUT020
21 OUT021 OUT021 22 OUT022 OUT022 SINGLE= Selecting a single level
23 OUT023 OUT023 24 OUT024 OUT024 MULTI= Selecting multiple levels
25 OUT025 OUT025 26 OUT026 OUT026
27 OUT027 OUT027 28 OUT028 OUT028
29 OUT029 OUT029 30 OUT030 OUT030 DEST SELECTION*2
31 OUT031 OUT031 32 OUT032 OUT032
DISABLE=The destination change from panel is
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN Right:DESTINATION Left:SOURCE disabled.
ENABLE=The destination change from panel is enabled.
Example of Setting Screen
*1: Applicable to BKS-R3210 only.
*2: Applicable to BKS-R1607 only.
*3: When monitor S-BUS is used, select STAND ALONE= Stand alone
machine at all times since mother-daughter setting is not necessary.

5-52 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-4. Setting Items of the Secondary Station on Monitor S-BUS (BKDS-V3293B only)

Setting Procedure n
1. Select menu item [Z]. Checksum can be displayed from version V1.10 of the
2. The cursor appears at “DISPLAY MODE=1.” BKS series.
Move the cursor to the desired mode. (Use the keys Use checksum to check if the program data is correct,
[(], [)].) Press [Enter] to enter the input mode. in addition to the version number indication. (The
3. Input the number to be selected using the numerical PGM CHECKSUM is mainly used.)
keys. The following three types of checksum are available.
Press [Enter] to set the input number. The cursor
moves to the setting item. BOOT CHECKSUM=D039
When you want to modify the default value, press Checksum of the program area that is used for starting
[Enter] without inputting any number. up the ROM.
PGM CHECKSUM=630F
MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R1607 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 7 Check of the area in which the actual programs are
SET PANEL STATUS
stored.
DISPLAY MODE = 1 1:STATUS 2:PROMPT
PROTECT MODE = 2 1:ON AIR 2:NORMAL
ROM CHECKSUM=FF68
PHANTOM PROTECT = 1 1:PART PROT 2:FULL PROT 3:BUTTON LINK Checksum of the entire ROM.
PANEL MODE = 1 1:STAND ALONE 2:MOTHER 3:DAUGHTER
PANEL LAYOUT = * 1:TYPE + NUM. 2:DIRECT *:UNRELATED
LEVEL MODE = * 1:SINGLE 2:MULTI *:UNRELATED MONITOR SYSTEM SETUP MENU BKS-R3210 V1.10 STATION NUMBER 6
DEST SELECTION = 1 1:DISABLE 2:ENABLE *:UNRELATED SET PANEL STATUS
DISPLAY MODE = 1 1:STATUS 2:PROMPT
PROTECT MODE = 2 1:ON AIR 2:NORMAL
PHANTOM PROTECT = 1 1:PART PROT 2:FULL PROT 3:BUTTON LINK
PANEL MODE = 1 1:STAND ALONE 2:MOTHER 3:DAUGHTER
PANEL LAYOUT = 2 1:TYPE + NUM. 2:DIRECT *:UNRELATED
BLOCK & MOTHER STATION LIST LEVEL MODE = 1 1:SINGLE 2:MULTI *:UNRELATED
BLOCK 1 = ....... | BLOCK 6 = ....... DEST SELECTION = * 1:DISABLE 2:ENABLE *:UNRELATED
BLOCK 2 = ....... | BLOCK 7 = .......
BLOCK 3 = ....... | BLOCK 8 = .......
BLOCK 4 = ....... | BLOCK 9 = ....... BLOCK & MOTHER STATION LIST
BLOCK 5 = ....... | BLOCK10 = ....... BLOCK 1 = ....... | BLOCK 6 = .......
BLOCK 2 = ....... | BLOCK 7 = .......
BLOCK 3 = ....... | BLOCK 8 = .......
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN BLOCK 4 = ....... | BLOCK 9 = .......
BLOCK 5 = ....... | BLOCK10 = .......
BOOT CHECKSUM=D039 PGM CHECKSUM=630F ROM CHECKSUM=FF68
Example of Setting Screen
Ctrl-E:MENU Ctrl-D:RETURN

Example of Setting Screen

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-53

5-5. Backup of Setting Data
5-6. When Data is Lost

5-5. Backup of Setting Data

The data set using the control terminal will be stored in the RAM on the CPU board. It is however
recommended that the setting data be backed up just in case the data is damaged or lost.
Data can be backed up easily by using the Sony routing switcher system control software BZR-1000 (run
with a IBM PC/AT or compatible machine) or BZR-10.

5-6. When Data is Lost

DVS-V3232B/V6464B

If the LED (D7) on the CPU board is not lit even if the error No. indicator shows “00” when operations
are being checked, it means that all the data set have been lost.
The first thing to do is to check the setting of COR1 on the CPU board.
OFF : Set to ON position.
ON : The lithium battery (BT1) may be defective.
Measure voltage across BT1. If it is 2V or less, replace it with the new one.
Consult with your Sony Sales Representative for replacement of battery.

Next, initialize the unit as following procedures.

1. Set the COR1 on the CPU-149 board to ON.
2. Set the test switch (S3) to “D” and press the reset switch (S5).
3. Set the test switch (S3) to “0” and press the reset switch (S5).
4. Call the menu screen on the control terminal and execute the menu item [T : SET CLOCK].

BKPF-R70

If the LED (D2) on the CPU board is not lit even if the error No. indicator shows “00” when operations
are being checked, it means that all the data set have been lost.
The lithium battery (BT1) may be defective.
Measure voltage across BT1. If it is 2V or less, replace it with the new one (CR-2025).
Consult with your Sony Sales Representative for replacement of battery.

HDS-V3232

If the LED (D13) on the CPU board is not lit even if the error No. indicator shows “00” when operations
are being checked, it means that all the data set have been lost.
The first thing to do is to check the setting of the CN5 on the CPU board.
OFF : Set to ON position.
ON : The lithium battery (BT1) may be defective.
Measure voltage across BT1. If it is 2V or less, replace it with the new one.
Consult with your Sony Sales Representative for replacement of battery.

Next, initialize the unit as following procedures.

1. Set the COR1 on the CPU-251 board to ON.
2. Set the test switch (S2) to “D” and press the reset switch (S8).
3. Set the test switch (S2) to “0” and press the reset switch (S8).
4. Call the menu screen on the control terminal and execute the menu item [T : SET CLOCK].

5-54 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-7. Initialization of Table Data

5-7. Initialization of Table Data

There are five ways of initializing the table data. Note that the way to be used depends on which item is
initialized.

5-7-1. Initializing Procedure and Corresponding Items

DVS-V3232B/V6464B :

Initializing Procedure Corresponding Menu Items

1 1. Set the test switch (S3) on the CPU-149 board to “D”. All items of the primary and secondary stations.
2. Press the reset switch (S5).
2 1. Set the test switch (S3) on the CPU-149 board to “C”. [W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG]
2. Press the reset switch (S5).
3 Select the menu item [K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE] All items of the primary station excluding the
of the primary station and press [Y]. following 4 items.
. [H : SET GLOBAL PHANTOM]
. [N : SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP]
. [O : SET TIE LINES]
. [W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG]
4 Select the menu item [K : reset To default table] All items of the secondary station excluding
of the secondary station and press [Y]. the crosspoint data.
5 Select the menu item [U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL] [U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL]
of the secondary station and press [F2] (DEFAULT).

BKPF-R70 :

Initializing Procedure Corresponding Menu Items

1 1. Set the test switch (S5) on the CPU-256 board to “D”. All items of the primary and secondary stations.
2. Press the reset switch (S1).
2 1. Set the test switch (S5) on the CPU-256 board to “C”. [W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG]
2. Press the reset switch (S1).
3 Select the menu item [K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE] All items of the primary station excluding the
of the primary station and press [Y]. following 4 items.
. [H : SET GLOBAL PHANTOM]
. [N : SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP]
. [O : SET TIE LINES]
. [W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG]
4 Select the menu item [K : reset To default table] All items of the secondary station excluding
of the secondary station and press [Y]. the crosspoint data.
5 Select the menu item [U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL] [U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL]
of the secondary station and press [F2] (DEFAULT).

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-55

5-7. Initialization of Table Data

HDS-V3232 :

Initializing Procedure Corresponding Menu Items

1 1. Set the test switch (S2) on the CPU-251 board to “D”. All items of the primary and secondary stations.
2. Press the reset switch (S8).
2 1. Set the test switch (S2) on the CPU-251 board to “C”. [W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG]
2. Press the reset switch (S8).
3 Select the menu item [K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE] All items of the primary station excluding the
of the primary station and press [Y]. following 4 items.
. [H : SET GLOBAL PHANTOM]
. [N : SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP]
. [O : SET TIE LINES]
. [W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG]
4 Select the menu item [K : reset To default table] All items of the secondary station excluding
of the secondary station and press [Y]. the crosspoint data.
5 Select the menu item [U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL] [U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL]
of the secondary station and press [F2] (DEFAULT).

n
The primary station of HDS-V3232 does not have the menu item[S].
The secondary station of the menu item [Z] of [SWITCHING FIELD] only.

5-7-2. Default Values Initialization

Item Default Value

Primary station [B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE] TYPE : 0=IN, 1=OUT, 2-F=None

NAME : IN001-IN512, OUT001-OUT512
[E : SET LEVEL TABLE] All levels of all destination is ENABLE
Level name : 1, 2, 3....7, 8
[F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER] DVS-V3232B : STATION 2-33 ENABLE
DVS-V6464B : STATION 2-65 ENABLE
[H : SET GLOBAL PHANTOM] Not set
[J : NAME STYLE] Type + Num (“Type + Number” name mode)
[L : SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT] Physical location number=Virtual location number
[M : SET INHIBIT TABLE] Not set
[N : SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP]
[O : SET TIE LINES]
[P : CHANGE PASSWORD]
[S : SELECT INDICATION COLOR] OFF
[U : SELECT CONTROL MODE] All channels : DIRECT
[V : SELECT WARNING DISPLAY] OFF
[W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG] NO LOG
[Z : SET UNIT DETECTABLE] All STATION : OFF
Secondary station [A : SET UNIT LOCATION ] No OFFSET
[U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL] The input /output number is 1:1.
[Z : SELECT SDI FORMAT] 4:2:2, SWITCHING FIELD=FIELD
Crosspoint data The input/output number is 1:1.

5-56 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 5-8. Signal Switching Timing

5-8. Signal Switching Timing

For DVS-V3232B/V6464B and HDS-V3232, a SWITCHING FIELD which switch signals from the control terminal can
be set. The SWITCHING FIELD are set using menu item “Z” of the secondary station and any SWITCHING FIELD
mode (ODD, EVEN, FIELD, ASYNC) can be selected.
The signal switching timing depends on whether it is controlled by RS-422A or the S-BUS.
The following shows the timing charts of RS-422A and S-BUS for each SWITCHING FIELD mode.

. When SWITCHING FIELD “EVEN” is set

RS-422A S-BUS

Switching Command Switching Executed Switching Command Switching Executed

ODD EVEN ODD EVEN ODD EVEN ODD EVEN

Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4

Switching Command Switching Executed Switching Command Switching Executed

ODD EVEN ODD EVEN ODD EVEN ODD EVEN

Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4

. When SWITCHING FIELD “ODD” is set

RS-422A S-BUS

Switching Command Switching Executed Switching Command Switching Executed

ODD EVEN ODD EVEN ODD EVEN ODD EVEN

Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4

Switching Command Switching Executed Switching Command Switching Executed

ODD EVEN ODD EVEN ODD ODD EVEN ODD EVEN

Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Field 5 Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4

. When SWITCHING FIELD “FIELD” is set

RS-422A S-BUS

Switching Command Switching Executed Switching Command Switching Executed

ODD EVEN ODD EVEN ODD EVEN ODD EVEN

Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4

Switching Command Switching Executed Switching Command Switching Executed

ODD EVEN ODD EVEN ODD EVEN ODD EVEN

Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4

. When SWITCHING FIELD “ASYNC” is set

The signals will be switched immediately after the switching command is received regardless of the control method and
protocol used.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 5-57

 Section 6
Confirmation of function

6-1. Outline

After the hardware and software have been set up, it is necessary to check if the system is working
properly before starting the operation.

Each routing switcher is equipped with the self-diagnosis function to check the system connection and
status of each unit. As soon as the power of the unit is supplied or the system is reset, this function begins
operations which check internal conditions and connections automatically. When a fault is detected, this
is immediately displayed via the following four methods.

1. Status indicator
2. System status screen (*)
3. Error No. indicator
4. LEDs on the boards

Moreover, the test mode and ISR function are available to find out the detail of error and cause.

This section outlines the checks performed when the system is started up, and describes error messages
displayed on [2. System status screen] in detail.

For details of [1. Status indicator], [3. Error No. indicator] and ISR function, refer to the operation manual
or maintenance manual provided with the unit. For [4. LEDs on the boards] and [Test mode], refer to the
maintenance manual.

* : The error messages displayed in [2. System Status Screen] are valid only when the control terminal is connected to the primary
station in the S-BUS control system.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 6-1

6-2. Function Check Format

6-2. Function Check Format

The contents of each function and the structure of the error displays are as follows.

LED Display for Internal Test Mode Function

Information Test mode is effective for finding the
LED displays the presence/absence of causes of the error and the faulty
the signals and setting of the switches sections which have been detected by
independently, irrespective of the self- the self-diagnosis function. It checks
diagnosis and test mode. LEDs,switches and signal circuit using
a rotary switch on CPU board.

LEDs on Board Error No. Indicator *1

Function Check

Status Indicator *1 Error No. Indicator *1

Contorl Terminal (System Status Screen)

Error Information When

Status Display *1 Error Messages Error Codes *1
Power ON

Self-diagnosis Function
The self-diagnosis function of the routing switcher checks/judges hardware problem,
disconnected wires, the conditon of the sync signal, the execution of the backup function,
the communication errors,etc.

*1 : HDS-V3232 does not have run diagnostics check on Status indicator and Error No. indicator.

6-2 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 6-3. How the Self-Diagnosis Items are Related

6-3. How the Self-Diagnosis Items are Related

Status Indicator *1 Control Terminal Display Error No. Indicator *1

Lit in Green:
Operating Normally 00 Operating normally

Blinking in Green:
Faulty sync signal detection Faulty sync signal detection 6* Faulty sync signal detection

Blinking in Red:
Faulty crosspoint
Faulty crosspoint hardware 4* Faulty crosspoint hardware
hardware

7* Increase in the switcher's

Increase in the switcher's Increase in the switcher's internal
internal temperature/Fan has
internal temperature/Fan temperature/Fan has stopped
stopped
has stopped

2* Communication error of the

S-BUS deta link has
S-BUS deta link has been disconnected REMOTE 1 connector (BNC)
disconnected
/S-BUS

Communication trouble of the

Other errors
primary statiom

Communication error with a

secondary station

8* ROM/RAM/EEPROM check
ROM/RAM/EEPROM check error error or table deta reading error

Re-start display 1* Communication error of the

REMOTE 2 connector (9-pin)
/RS-422A
Display of the input/output board
insertion 3* Communication error of the
REMOTE 3 connector (25-pin)
/RS-232C

5* Incorrect setting data of the

backup memory

Start-up of backup power supply

Lit in Red:
Start-up of backup unit
Start-up of backup CPU board FF Malfunction of CPU board

*1 : HDS-V3232 does not have run diagnostics check on Status indicator and Error No. indicator.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 6-3

6-4. Diagnosis Items for Each Model

6-4. Diagnosis Items for Each Model

Self-diagnosis Items Error Display Model
*1 *1
Status Status Error No. DVS-V1616 DVS-V3232B DVS-A3232 DVS-R1616
Indicator display Indicator DVS-V6464B DVS-TC3232
HDS-V3232 BVS-V323
BVS-A3232

Checking normal operations O _ O O O O O

Detecting sync signals O O O O O O O
Detecting the sync signals _ _ O _ _ O _
of the timing generator
Sync signal lock function _ _ O _ _ O _
of the timing generator
OK/NG of crosspoint O O O O O O O
hardware
Unit’s internal temperature/ O O O O O O O
Fan’s driving condition
Detecting disconnection in O O O O O O O
the S-BUS data link
Communicating condition with _ O _ _ O _ _
Secondary stations
ROM/RAM/EEPROM check _ O O O O O O
Re-start display _ O _ O O O O
Display of input/output _ O _ _ O*2 O O
board insertion
Display of input/output _ O _ O O*2 O O
board no-insertion
Communicating condition _ _ O O _ O O
of REMOTE2/RS-422A
Communicating condition _ _ O O _ O O
of REMOTE3/RS-232C
Backup memory setting data _ _ O O O O O
Set-up of backup power O O _ _ O O O
supply
Start-up back-up CPU board O O O _ O O O
CPU board operations O O O _ O O O
Timer stop _ O _ _ O _ _

*1 : HDS-V3232 does not have run diagnostics check on Status indicator and Error No. indicator.
*2 : HDS-V3232 is valid only when has been not inserted the input/output board, when input/output board insertion/no-
insertion will be displayed.

6-4 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 6-5. Function Check Process

6-5. Function Check Process

After installing the hardware and software of the routing switcher system, check its functions and those of
each device according to the following procedures. The process of the function check consists of three
steps. The checks in step 2 and onward will be performed only when errors have been detected in step 1.
If not, the checking process ends there. When errors have been displayed in step 1, except the cases that
causes are found with the display contents, it is necessary to find out the faulty sections and causes by
performing the checks from step 2. Countermeasures and the methods of fixing the errors are described in
detail in the operation manuals and maintenance manuals provided. For the counter-measures and reme-
dies, refer to the operation manual or the maintenance manual supplied with the unit.

1 Turn on the power of the S-BUS data link unit

STEP1 2 Check the status indicator

Normal
3 Check the system status screen

4 Check the menu screen

STEP2 5 Open the front panel

Check the LED displays

on the board Counter-
6 Check the error code measures

(As repuired)

STEP3 7 Execute the test mode

8 Completion of function check

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 6-5

6-6. Function Check with Control Terminal

6-6. Function Check with Control Terminal

There are two types of display modes for operation check from control terminal, which can be selected
depending upon the purpose. The first type of display mode is provided by the system status display and
the other is provided by the “W” menu on the menu display.
The system status display shows result of self diagnostics that is performed automatically by the primary
station when the main power of the system is turned on. It also shows error messages that are issued by
the respective stations on the S-BUS data link in real time, enabling to use the system status display as the
monitor of system operation during system run.

To check the old system status, call the menu item [W: SYSTEM STATUS LOG].
This menu takes out only the system status from the memory, and displays error messages, corresponding
station and time of occurrence.

n
As the control terminal constantly checks the errors of the system, and is capable of recording/displaying
these, it is extremely effective for monitoring the operations of the system. Therefore, it is recommended
to connect this control terminal after completing initial settings.

6-6-1. System status screen after power on

When the power of the primary station is turned on, the results of the self-diagnosis of the primary station
and the ROM checksum value, will be displayed as shown in the figure below.
If the result of the self-diagnosis is normal, “OK” will be displayed for this item. If errors have been
detected, the corresponding item will be the reversal characters.

SONY Digital Routing System DVS-V6464B V2.10

ITEM
1 ROM CHECK SUM 8A65
2 RAM READ AND WRITE OK
3 REFERENCE SIGNAL OK
4 S-BUS LINK TERMINATE OK
5 REAL TIME CLOCK
STARTED
1993.02.03-22.15 STARTED BY DVS-V6464B Ver2.10 IN STATION 1
1993.02.03-22.15 S-BUS LINK DISCONNECTED TO CHANNEL B
1993.02.03-22.15 MISSING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN STATION 1
1993.02.03-22.15 POWER SUPPLY UNIT B DOWN IN STATION 1

Example of the System Status Screen After Power On

Display Contents:
1 ROM checksum value on the CPU board of the primary station.
2 Condition of the reading/writing operations of the RAM in the primary station.
3 The result of detecting the reference signal in the primary station.
4 Presence of the 75 Z termination in the S-BUS data link.
5 Oscillation of the real time clock IC.

6-6 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 6-6. Function Check with Control Terminal

6-6-2. System status screen during the system operation

When a message is output to the S-BUS data link, the system status screen will display this message with
the date and time of occurrence. When an error occurs during the operation of the system, the error
message will be displayed.

1990.10.12-15:42 S-BUS LINK DISCONNECTED Error message

1990.10.27-09:28 STARTED BY BKS-R1601 Ver3.10 IN STATION 11
1990.11.03-05:31 STARTED BY BKS-R3204 Ver3.11 IN STATION 32
1991.01.14-13:51 MISSING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN STATION 1
1991.02.01-11:15 POWER SUPPLY UNIT B DOWN IN STATION 4 Error message
1991.02.04-06:11 X-POINT ERROR IN STATION 1

Example of System Status Screen During System Operation

6-6-3. Menu item [W: SYSTEM STATUS LOG]

On the other hand, the menu item [W: SYSTEM STATUS LOG] can be used to call all the error informa-
tion stored in the RAM of the primary station, such as the content and time of errors in each station and
on the S-BUS circuit.

Operating procedure:
1. Turn on the power supply of the primary station to automatically start up the system status screen.
2. Press [Ctrl] _ [X] to display the menu screen.
The password will be requested if it has been set. Input the password using the numerical and alpha-
bet keys, and press [Return] or [Enter] .
3. Select the menu item [W].
4. “__ more __” will be displayed at the bottom of the screen if all error contents cannot be displayed
on a screen.
Press [SPACE] to display the next error content. “__ end __” will be displayed when all error
contents have been displayed.
5. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to return to the menu screen.
6. Press [Ctrl] _ [X] to return to the system status screen.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 6-7

6-6. Function Check with Control Terminal

6-6-4. Contents and countermeasures of the error messages

The control terminal will display eleven types of error messages according to the error content.
However, depending on the model, some are not used because of no detection, or some part of the
message may differ. For details of the messages and their countermeasures, refer to operation manuals
provided with each model.
Standard error messages and their countermeasures are as follows.

X-POINT ERROR IN STATION * * *

Content : Faulty crosspoint hardware

As a result of comparing the presence/absence of the crosspoint signal in the station
being displayed, this message will be displayed if the input signal was found to be
present without the output signal, and vice versa, or if the input/output board has not
been inserted correctly.

Countermeasure : The crosspoint of station * * * is faulty. Check the input/output board has been
properly installed.

TEMPERATURE RISE OR FAN STOP IN STATION * * *

Content : This message is displayed when the temperature inside of the station being displayed
has risen, or when the fan has stopped.

Countermeasure : Promptly turn off the power supply of station * * *, and check for short-circuits,
power leakage, faults of the mechanical parts surrounding the fan, etc.

MISSING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN STATION * * *

Content : This message is displayed when the SYNC/ASYNC select switch on the CPU board of
the switcher has been set to the sync switching mode (SYNC), and the reference video
signal has not been input to the REF IN connector.

Countermeasure : Connect the sync signal to the REF IN connector of station * * *.

n
Set the SYNC/ASYNC select switch to “ASYNC” if the reference signal is not present. When the
reference signal is not input in the sync switching mode (SYNC), the crosspoint is switched automatically
as the async switching mode (ASYNC).

CHANGED OVER TO BACKUP POWER SUPPLY IN STATION * * *

Content : This message is displayed when the power supply output during operations has
dropped and it is changed over to the backup power supply.

Countermeasure : Remove the faulty power supply of station * * *, and repair or replace it with a new
one.

6-8 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 6-6. Function Check with Control Terminal

DIFFERENT CHECK SUM= ???? IN STATION * * *

Check sun value

Content : This message is displayed when an error has been detected as the result of ROM
checksum and RAM writing tests performed after resetting the unit.

Countermeasure : Replace the corresponding ROM.

n
This error message will be displayed even after the ROM has been replaced. This is normal. Execute the
menu item [J: RECALL MAIN TABLE] from the control terminal, and reset the corresponding unit once
again for the unit to begin operating normally.

S-BUS LINK DISCONNECTED

Content : This message is displayed when the S-BUS data link has been disconnected some-
where.

Countermeasure : Check the connections between the S-BUS line and each station, and check that unused
S-BUS ports or the ends of S-BUS lines have been terminated with 75 Z. One method
to search for the disconnected sections is using the menu item [R: CALL SECOND-
ARY STATION] and checking for responses.

n
Be sure to terminate unused S-BUS ports with 75 Z. When a disconnection has been detected, the
primary station automatically performs 75 Z termination and restarts communication with the stations
just before the disconnection. In this case, some stations may not be able to communicate even though
they are connected.

CHANGED OVER TO BACKUP CPU IN STATION * * *

Content : This message is displayed when an error has occurred in the CPU board during opera-
tions, and it is changed over to the backup CPU board.

Countermeasure : Remove the main CPU board, and repair or replace it with a new one.

STARTED BY * * * _ * * * * * Ver * .* * IN STATION * * *

Content : This message is displayed when the switcher is restarted due to instantaneous power
failure, etc., or when the power supply is turned ON.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 6-9

6-6. Function Check with Control Terminal

STATION * * * FAILURE(DISCONNECTED OR POWER DOWN)

Content : This message is displayed when communication with the station set at the menu item
[F] is stopped.

Countermeasure : Check the status indicator of station * * *, and perform the adjustment corresponding
to the symptom.

VALID INPUT OR OUTPUT BOARD IN STATION * * *

Content : This message is displayed when the input/output board has been inserted to station * * *.

INVALID INPUT OR OUTPUT BOARD IN STATION * * *

Content : This message is displayed when the input/output board has been removed from * * *.

6-10 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 Section 7
Change Information on DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series
and DVS-V3232M/V6464M

7-1. Outline (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series)

The S-BUS protocol is extended of its virtual matrix size from 512 to 1024.
At the same time the following functions are changed.

. Number of SOURCE/DEST TYPEs is extended from 16 to 32.

. Selection of either 1024 x 1024 x 8 level or 1024 x 512 x 16 level is added.
. Number of the GLOBAL PHANTOM is reduced from 4093 to 2800.
. The multi source assignment function is added.
. Number of DESCRIPTION NAME is extended from 1024 to 2048.
. Number of the Tie Line signals is increased from 4 to 255.

In the following description, the product that supports the virtual matrix size 512 is called the S-BUS P1
type, and the product that supports the virtual matrix size 1024 is called the S-BUS P2 type.
The S-P2 has the higher compatibility with the S-P1 but has the several limitations.
The S-P2 is realized by extending the type number of the terminal name from 16 to 32, and by changing
the data structure of the terminal names. The 16 types of the terminal number data that are used in the S-
P1, do not have compatibility with the 32 types of terminal number data that are used in the S-P2. There-
fore, the S-P2 has two types of data i.e., both the 16 type data and the 32 type data for each terminal of
terminal number 1 to 512. The 16 type data needs to be used for the terminal numbers of 1 to 512 when
the S-P1 UMD and the remote control panel are used in the system. The 32 type data needs to be used for
the terminal numbers of 513 to 1024.
When all of the UMD and the remote control panel within the system is of the S-P2 type, the terminal
numbers of 1 to 512 must be set to the 32 type data.
When use of the remote control panels of the S-P1 and S-P2 types are mixed, use of the S-P1 remote
control panel is limited within the range of terminal numbers from 1 to 512. In such a case, the S-P2
remote control panel can handle the 32 type data with the terminal numbers of 513 to 1024.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 7-1

7-2. Changed Menu (Primary Station Setting Items)

7-2. Changed Menu (Primary Station Setting Items)

n
The menu screen shown below is based on the DVS-128.

Initial screen (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series)

When the [Ctrl] _ [X] key is pressed after the main power is turned on, the following display appears.

SONY ROUTING SYSTEM SETUP MENU DVS-128 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1

MODIFICATION COMMAND

A: DISPLAY CONTROL AREA B: SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE
C: SET DESTINATION NAME D: SET SOURCE NAME
E: SET LEVEL TABLE F: SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER
G: UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER H: SET GLOBAL PHANTOM
J: NAME STYLE(Type + Num) L: SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT
M: SET INHIBIT TABLE N: SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP
O: SET TIE LINES Q: CHANGE CROSSPOINT
R: CALL SECONDARY STATION S: SET SOURCE ASSIGNMENT

MAINTENANCE COMMAND

P: CHANGE PASSWORD T: SET CLOCK
U: SELECT CONTROL MODE W: SYSTEM STATUS LOG
X: DISPLAY S-BUS COMMUNICATION Z: SET UNIT DETECTABLE


Ctrl-X/B:QUIT SETUP MENU

Example of Initial Screen

Changed item

. [K: RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE] is deleted from the primary station screen and is moved to the
secondary station screen.
When [K: RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE] is executed on the secondary station screen, the partial
initialization is executed in the S-P1, but is changed so that all data including the works is reset to the
default data when shipped from the factory.
. [S: SET SOURCE ASSIGNMENT] is newly added.
. The [Ctrl] _ [B] key is added as the key input to return to the initial menu (the screen when the main
power is turned on.) The [Ctrl] _ [B] key has the same function as the [Ctrl] _ [X].

7-2 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 7-2. Changed Menu (Primary Station Setting Items)

A : DISPLAY CONTROL AREA B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE

(DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series) (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series)

Purpose Purpose
This menu displays the control size as the primary station. This menu is used to set the type name of the source
destination and global phantom table.
DISPLAY CONTROL AREA DVS-128 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1
The menu makes the management of source/destination

SOURCE No 0001-1024 DESTINATION No 0001-1024 LEVEL 1-8
easier.
The alphanumeric characters of 4 characters or less can be

used. Either 16 type data or the 32 type data can be


selected for the terminal numbers of 1 to 512.

SOURCE/DEST/PHANTOM TYPE DVS-128 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1


TYPE:32

0=IN 1=OUT 2=.... 3=.... 4=.... 5=.... 6=.... 7=....
8=.... 9=.... A=.... B=.... C=.... D=.... E=.... F=....
G=.... H=.... I=.... J=.... K=.... L=.... M=.... N=....
O=.... P=.... Q=.... R=.... S=.... T=.... U=.... V=....




Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU


Example of Display Screen


When LEVEL: 1 to 16 on the [E: SET LEVEL TABLE]

screen is set to 1, the message [SOURCE No. 0001-1024
DESTINATION No. 0001-0512 LEVEL 1-16] appears.
F1:TYPE Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
There are no input items or set items on this screen.
Example of Setting Screen

. Every pressing of [F1:TYPE] triggers between TYPE:

16 and TYPE: 32. Either one of the data structures of
the terminal name to be handed by the S-P1, is selected.
. When [F1] is pressed, the message [Do you change the
type number? Y or N] appears. When either [Y] or [N]
is pressed, change the setting of the type number.

The terminal name from 1 to 512

. TYPE : 16 The names up to 16 types can be used.
When the S-P1 type remote control panel
or the UMD is used in the system, select
the TYPE 16.
. TYPE : 32 The names up to 32 types can be used.
When the S-P1 type remote control panel
or the UMD is used in the system, the
correct display or correct operation
cannot be performed.

The terminal names of No. 513 to 1024 are fixed to type

32 without affected by this setting.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 7-3

7-2. Changed Menu (Primary Station Setting Items)

E : SET LEVEL TABLE O : SET TIE LINES (DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series)

(DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series)
Purpose
Purpose Change/addition/deletion of the TIE LINE data are per-
The level name can be set, and the valid level for each formed here.
output terminal can be set.
SET TIE LINES DVS-128 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1
Number of levels of either 8 or 16 can also be selected.
--PATHS 1------------------------------------------------------------------
SOURCE: SOURCE No. DESTINETION No. ROUTE: SOURCE No. DESTINETION No.
LEVEL TABLE DVS-128 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1
L1 0001 - 0080 0001 - 0004 L2 0081 - 0082 0080 - 0086
LEVEL:1-16
DESTINATION:SOURCE No. DESTINETION No.
1=VIT 2=A1 3=A2 4=TC 5=REM 6=B32 7=.... 8=....
L1 0083 - 0089 0100 - 0130
9=.... 10=.... 11=.... 12=.... 13=.... 14=.... 15=.... 16=....
--PATHS 2------------------------------------------------------------------
No. out VIT A1 A2 TC REM B32 .... ....
SOURCE: SOURCE No. DESTINETION No. ROUTE: SOURCE No. DESTINETION No.
0001 OUT001 VIT A1 .... .... .... .... .... ....
L2 0001 - 0040 0005 - 0006 L. .... - .... .... - ....
0002 OUT002 VIT A1 .... .... .... .... .... ....
DESTINATION:SOURCE No. DESTINETION No.
0003 OUT003 VIT A1 A2 TC REM B32 .... ....
L1 0200 - 0201 0300 - 0400
0004 OUT004 VIT A1 A2 TC REM B32 .... ....
--PATHS 3------------------------------------------------------------------
0005 OUT005 VIT A1 A2 TC REM B32 .... ....
SOURCE: SOURCE No. DESTINETION No. ROUTE: SOURCE No. DESTINETION No.
0006 OUT006 VIT A1 A2 TC REM B32 .... ....
L. .... - .... .... - .... L. .... - .... .... - ....
0007 OUT007 VIT A1 A2 TC REM B32 .... ....
DESTINATION:SOURCE No. DESTINETION No.
0008 OUT008 VIT A1 A2 TC REM B32 .... ....
L. .... - .... .... - ....
0009 OUT009 VIT A1 A2 TC REM B32 .... ....
--PATHS 4------------------------------------------------------------------
0010 OUT010 VIT A1 A2 TC REM B32 .... ....
SOURCE: SOURCE No. DESTINETION No. ROUTE: SOURCE No. DESTINETION No.
0011 OUT011 VIT A1 A2 TC REM B32 .... ....
L. .... - .... .... - .... L. .... - .... .... - ....
0012 OUT012 VIT A1 A2 TC REM B32 .... ....
DESTINATION:SOURCE No. DESTINETION No.
0013 OUT013 VIT A1 A2 TC REM B32 .... ....
L. .... - .... .... - ....
0014 OUT014 VIT A1 A2 TC REM B32 .... ....

0015 OUT015 VIT A1 A2 TC REM B32 .... ....
F1:PgUp F2:PgDn Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
0016 OUT016 VIT A1 A2 TC REM B32 .... ....
0017 OUT017 VIT A1 A2 TC REM B32 .... ....
Example of Setting Screen
F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F3:LEVEL Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Example of Setting Screen To set the number, press [Enter] to be ready for number
input. Enter a number in the range of 1 to 1024. When
Every pressing of [F3:LEVEL] toggles between the [Enter] is pressed again, the number is set, the range is
LEVEL: 1-8 display and the LEVEL: 1-16 display on the checked and duplication of the same number with other
2 nd line. setting is checked. Then the number is set.
The LEVEL 9-16 is realized by switching the Destination If duplication of the number is found, the entered number
to which 512 is added, at the same time. becomes invalid and the former number remains as it is.
When the system is used with the LEVEL 1-16, the remote To delete a terminal number, press [Enter] without
control panel that supports the LEVEL 1-16 becomes inputting a numbers. Then “....” appears and the terminal
necessary. number is deleted.
Number of the signals to be set is 254 at the maximum.
Number of the TIE LINEs to be set is 16 paths at the
maximum.

7-4 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 7-2. Changed Menu (Primary Station Setting Items)

(Example)
An example in which the three matrices of 10 x 10 are used and are connected by the Tie-Line, is shown.
A signal of IN 1-10 and IN 13-20 can be selected from OUT 21-30 in this example.

SET TIE LINES DVS-128 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1

--PATHS 1------------------------------------------------------------------
SOURCE: SOURCE No. DESTINETION No. ROUTE: SOURCE No. DESTINETION No.
L1 0001 - 0010 0009 - 0010 L2 0011 - 0012 0017 - 0018
DESTINATION:SOURCE No. DESTINETION No.
L1 0021 - 0022 0021 - 0030
--PATHS 2------------------------------------------------------------------
SOURCE: SOURCE No. DESTINETION No. ROUTE: SOURCE No. DESTINETION No.
L2 0013 - 0020 0019 - 0020 L. .... - .... .... - ....
DESTINATION:SOURCE No. DESTINETION No.
L1 0023 - 0024 0021 - 0030

Example of Setting Screen

1 ~ 10

1 10
1 1
~

10 x 10
13 ~ 20

8 8
9
10
LEVEL 1
12 11 13 20
11 11
25 31
16 16
10 x 10 17
18
19
20
LEVEL 2
24 23 22 21 25 31
21 21
~

10 x 10

30 30
LEVEL 1

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 7-5

7-2. Changed Menu (Primary Station Setting Items)
7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items)

S : SET SOURCE ASSIGNMENT 7-3. Changed Menu

(DVS-128/HDS-X3000 Series) (Secondary Station Setting Items)

Purpose N : SET PANEL TABLE (HDS-X3400)

Change/addition/deletion of the MULTIPLE SOURCE
name are performed here. When the signal name that has Purpose
been set as level 1 from the remote control, is supposed to This menu is used to set the switch of the BKS-R3400
be named as TAKE, the signals whose source numbers are (panel switch).
set here, can be selected in the level 2 and later.
Setting procedure
SET SOURCE ASSIGNMENT DVS-128 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1

1. Select the menu item “N”.
VID A-A1 A-A2 A3 A4 REM TBC SAPS 2. Select the desired button number using the cursor.
0001 IN001 IN001 IN001 IN001 IN001 IN001 IN001 IN001
0002 IN002 IN002 IN002 IN002 IN002 IN002 IN002 IN002 3. When [Enter] is pressed, the machine enters the channel
0003
0004
IN003
IN004
IN002
IN002
IN002
IN002
IN002
IN002
IN002
IN002
IN003
IN004
IN003
IN004
IN003
IN004
number input mode. The input mode is canceled if [Enter]
0005 IN005 IN005 IN005 IN005 IN005 IN005 IN005 IN005 is pressed before inputting the channel number in step 4.
0006 IN006 IN006 IN006 IN006 IN006 IN006 IN006 IN006
0007 C1 M1 ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... 4. Input the channel number of 1 to 16 from the keyboard.
0008 C2 M1 ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... .......
0009 C3 M2 ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... The input channel is input by entering a number to the table
0010 C4 M3 ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... of the SOURCE side, and the output channel is input by
0011 C5 M1 ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... .......
0012 IN012 IN012 IN012 IN012 IN012 IN012 IN012 IN012 entering a number to the table of the DESTINATION side.
5. Press [Enter] to set the input setting.
0013 IN013 IN013 IN013 IN013 IN013 IN013 IN013 IN013
0014 IN014 IN014 IN014 IN014 IN014 IN014 IN014 IN014
0015

IN015 IN015 IN015 IN015 IN015 IN015 IN015 IN015
6. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to return to the menu screen of the
0=IN 1=OUT 2=VTR 3=ENG 4=MCR 5=TEST 6=SNG 7=SS secondary station.
8=CG 9=SAT A=LMS B=EDIT C=CAM D=GPHA E=GPHB F=GPHC
G=17 H=18 I=19 J=20 K=21 L=22 M=23 N=24
O=25 P=26 Q=27 R=28 S=29 T=30 U=31 V=32 SET PANEL TABLE HDS-X3400 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1
F1:SEARCH F2:JUMP F3:PgUp F4:PgDn Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
SET PANEL TABLE(SOURCE)
01 KEY=001 02 KEY=002 03 KEY=003 04 KEY=004
Example of Setting Screen 05 KEY=005 06 KEY=006 07 KEY=007 08 KEY=008
09 KEY=009 10 KEY=010 11 KEY=011 12 KEY=012
13 KEY=013 14 KEY=014 15 KEY=015 16 KEY=016
The SOURCE name of LEVEL 1 is fixed in the same way 17 KEY= · · · · · · · 18 KEY= · · · · · · · 19 KEY= · · · · · · · 20 KEY= · · · · · · ·
21 KEY= · · · · · · · 22 KEY= · · · · · · · 23 KEY= · · · · · · · 24 KEY= · · · · · · ·
as the source name setting. The SOURCE names of the 25 KEY= · · · · · · · 26 KEY= · · · · · · · 27 KEY= · · · · · · · 28 KEY= · · · · · · ·
LEVEL-2 to 8 are set using this screen. 29 KEY= · · · · · · · 30 KEY= · · · · · · · 31 KEY= · · · · · · · 32 KEY= · · · · · · ·

Set the name by entering the Type number first then by SET PANEL TABLE(DESTINATION)
01 KEY= · · · · · · · 02 KEY= · · · · · · · 03 KEY= · · · · · · · 04 KEY= · · · · · · ·
entering the successive three digit number. This name can 05 KEY= · · · · · · · 06 KEY= · · · · · · · 07 KEY= · · · · · · · 08 KEY= · · · · · · ·
be deleted using [Ctrl] _ [P]. If an illegal name is set, a 09 KEY= · · · · · · · 10 KEY= · · · · · · · 11 KEY= · · · · · · · 12 KEY= · · · · · · ·
13 KEY= · · · · · · · 14 KEY= · · · · · · · 15 KEY= · · · · · · · 16 KEY= · · · · · · ·
message [The name is not defined] appears, the original 17 KEY=001 18 KEY=002 19 KEY= 003 20 KEY=004
21 KEY=005 22 KEY=006 23 KEY= 007 24 KEY= 008
name is resumed. When a valid SOURCE name has 25 KEY=009 26 KEY=010 27 KEY= 011 28 KEY= 012
30 KEY=014 31 KEY=015 32 KEY= 016
already been input, the name is set, the correspond 29 KEY=013

SOURCE number is internally saved and the cursor moves LED BRIGHTNESS LEVEL(1-8) 3
F1:TABLE F2:LED Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
to the next position.
When “Enter” is pressed without entering name, “....” Example of Setting Screen
appears and the setting is deleted.

7-6 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items)

V : DISPLAY UNIT STATUS (DVS-128)

Purpose
Purpose is to display the internal status of the equipment.
There are no setting on this screen.
Operating Function Keys Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to return to the menu screen of the
[F1] : TABLE (Mode which assigns source and destina- secondary station.
tion to the buttons)
DISPLAY UNIT STATUS DVS-128 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1
This setting is valid for local input/output physical ter-
INPUT BOARD MAIN CONNECTOR STYLE REFERENCE
minals of the HDS-X3400. The SOURCE and DESTI- 01-32 VALID VALID Analog Video A
NATION of other unit cannot be set from this button. 33-64 INVALID INVALID Analog Audio B
65-96 INVALID INVALID Digital Audio B
[F2] : LED (Mode which adjusts brightness of the button.) 97-128 INVALID INVALID ------------ -

1. Press [F2]. The cursor moves to [LED

OUTPUT BOARD MAIN CONNECTOR STYLE REFERENCE
BRIGHTNESS LEVEL (1-8)] on the screen. 01-32 VALID VALID Analog Video A
33-64 INVALID INVALID Analog Audio B
2. Press any key of 1 to 8 from the keyboard. 65-96 INVALID INVALID Digital Audio B
97-128 INVALID INVALID ------------ -
Brightness of the buttons will change accord-
ingly. (dark 1 ↔ 8 bright)
A B
CONTROL BOARD REFERENCE SIGNAL 525 625
MAIN S-BUS MONITOR SELECT FIELD FIELD ODD
n M V1.00 V1.00 V1.00 POWER SUPPLIES ON INVALID
B INVALID
The BKS-R3400 directly controls only the connected FAN1 FAN2 FAN3
HDS-X3400 regardless of the setting of the primary ROT ROT ROT

station, that is different from other remote control units. Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Example of Display Screen

Description of contents on display

MAIN or CONNECTOR : VALID/INVALID
Displays whether the board (MAIN) to be inserted from
the front and the rear connector board, are inserted or not.

STYLE : Analog Video/Analog Audio/Digital Audio

Displays the name of the optional signals that are inserted
to each option slot.

REFERENCE : A/B
Displays which of the two types of the reference signal, is
selected.

REFERENCE SIGNAL : 525/625

Displays the number of lines of the detected reference
signal.

SELECT FIELD : ASYNC/ODD/EVEN/FIELD

Displays the switching timing of matrix.

POWER SUPPLIES : ON/INVALID

Displays whether the power supply unit is inserted or not.

FANx : ROT/STOP
Displays whether the rear panel fan is rotating or not.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 7-7

7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items)

V : DISPLAY UNIT STATUS (HDS-X3000 Series)

Purpose
Purpose is to display the internal status of the equipment.
There are no setting on this screen.
Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to return to the menu screen of the
secondary station.
DISPLAY UNIT STATUS HDS-X3400 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1 DISPLAY UNIT STATUS HDS-X3700 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1

INPUT MAIN REVŁ CN 01-16 REVŁ P.S INPUT MAIN REVŁ CN01-16 REVŁ CN17-32 REVŁ P.S
01-16 HD SDI 1.0 HD SDI 1.0 OK 01-32Ł HD SDI 1.0 HD SDI 1.0 HD SDI 1.0 OK
33-64 HD SDI 1.0Ł HD 0pt16 1.0 HD SDI 1.0Ł OK
65-96Ł HD SDI 1.0 SD SDI 1.0 SD SDI 1.0 OK
97-128 INVALID INVALID INVALID

OUTPUT MAIN REVŁ CN 01-16 REVŁ P.S OUTPUT MAIN REVŁ CN01-16 REVŁ CN17-32 REVŁ P.S REF FANA FANB
01-16 HD SDI 1.0 HD SDI 1.0 OK 01-32Ł HD SDI 1.0 HD SDI 1.0 HD SDI 1.0 OK A ROT ROT
33-64Ł HD SDI 1.0Ł HD 0pt16 1.0 HD SDI 1.0 OK B ROT ROT
65-96Ł HD SDI 1.0 SD SDI 1.0 SD SDI 1.0 OK A ROT ROT
97-128 INVALID INVALID INVALID ROT ROT

FRONT PANEL BKS-R3400
A B
CONTROL BOARD REFERENCE SIGNAL 1125p CONTROL BOARD REFERENCE SIGNAL 1125p 625
MAIN S-BUS SELECT FIELD FIELD MAIN S-BUS MONITOR SELECT FIELD FIELD ODD
V1.00 V1.00 POWER SUPPLIES ON M V1.00 V1.00 V1.00 POWER SUPPLIES ON INVALID
B INVALID
FAN1 FAN2 FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 FAN4 FAN5 FAN6
ROT ROT ROT ROT ROT ROT ROT ROT

Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Example of Display Screen (HDS-X3400) Example of Display Screen (HDS-X3700)

Description of contents on display

DISPLAY UNIT STATUS HDS-X3600 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1
MAIN or CN01-16/CN17-32: HD SDI/SD SDI/HD 0pt8/
INPUT MAIN REVŁ CN01-16 REVŁ CN17-32 REVŁ P.S
01-32Ł HD SDI 1.0 HD SDI 1.0 HD SDI 1.0 OK
INVALID
33-64 HD SDI 1.0 HD 0pt16 1.0 HD SDI 1.0 OK Displays whether the board (MAIN) to be inserted from
the front and the rear connector board (CN01-16/CN17-
OUTPUT MAIN REVŁ CN01-16 REVŁ CN17-32 REVŁ P.S REF FANA FANB 32), are inserted or not.
01-32Ł HD SDI 1.0 HD SDI 1.0 HD SDI 1.0 OK A ROT ROT
33-64 HD SDI 1.0 HD 0pt16 1.0 HD SDI 1.0 OK B ROT ROT
P.S : OK/NG
Displays the power supply status of the MAIN and two CN boards.
A B
CONTROL BOARD REFERENCE SIGNAL 1125p 625 REV : REVISION of the boards
MAIN S-BUS MONITOR SELECT FIELD FIELD ODD
M V1.00 V1.00 V1.00 POWER SUPPLIES ON INVALID
B INVALID
FAN1 FAN2
REF : A/B
ROT ROT Displays which of the two types of the reference signal is selected.

Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

REFERENCE SIGNAL : 525i/625i/1125i

Example of Display Screen (HDS-X3600) Displays the number of lines of the detected reference signal.

SELECT FIELD : ASYNC/ODD/EVEN/FIELD/(ASYNC)

Displays the switching timing of the matrix.

POWER SUPPLIEDS : ON/INVALID/OVERLOAD

Displays the status of the power supply unit. When
OVERLOAD is displayed as this status, it means that the
excess number of rear optical connectors more than the
specified number are installed.
7-8 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)
 7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items)

Z : SET SDI FORMAT (HDS-X3000 Series)

FANA, FANB : ROT/STOP Purpose

Displays whether the fan on the matrix board is rotating or This menu is used to set the signal format for the output
not. board of the HDS-X3000 series (whether the signal is
reclocked in the HD-SDI or not) from the control terminal.
FANn : ROT/STOP This setting becomes valid when the dip switch of the
Displays whether the fan of the main unit (except the RECLOCK BYPASS of the output board is turned off.
power supply unit) is rotating or not. When the processor unit of HDS-X3000 series has the SD-
SDI output board (HKDS-X3050), the setting of the format
FRONT PANEL : BKS-R3400/INVALID is not required.
Displays whether the option switch is attached to the front
of the HDS-X3400 or not. Setting Procedure
1. Select the menu item “Z”.
n 2. Select the desired channel line using the cursor to be
If the board (MAIN) to be inserted from the front is not set. (The HDS-X3400 will be switched in every four
installed, the status of the rear connector board is not channels, and the HDS-X3600/X3700 will be switched
displayed correctly. in every eight channels.)
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the setting changes (“HD
SDI (RC)” ↔ “HD SDI (RC PASS)”).
4. Press [S] (Table Set), and the content now on display
is copied to the area of SDI FORMAT TABLE.

n
Unless pressing [S] (Table Set), the data will be
deleted when the power is turned off.

5. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to stop the display and return to the

menu screen of the secondary station.

SELECT SDI FORMAT HDS-X3400 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1

DESTINATION UNIT SOURCE UNIT

01 - 04 : HD SDI(RC) 01 - 04 :
05 - 08 : HD SDI(RC) 05 - 08 :
09 - 12 : HD SDI(RC) 09 - 12 :
13 - 16 : HD SDI(RC) 13 - 16 :

SWITCHING FIELD FIELD

F1:FORMAT F2:FIELD S:Table Set Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Example of Setting Screen (HDS-X3400)

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 7-9

7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items)

SELECT SDI FORMAT HDS-X3600 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1

Operating Function Keys
[F1] : FORMAT (Mode in which the HDS-X3400 is set in
DESTINATION UNIT SOURCE UNIT REFERENCE SELECT
the units of the four channels and the HDS-X3600/
01 - 08 : HD SDI(RC) 01 - 08 : 01 - 32 : A
09 - 16 : HD SDI(RC) 09 - 16 :
X3700 is set in the units of the eight channels)
17 - 24 : HD SDI(RC) 17 - 24 : HD SDI (RC) : When the input signal is HD-
25 - 32 : HD SDI(RC) 25 - 32 :
33 - 40 : HD SDI(RC PASS) 33 - 40 : 33 - 64 : AŁ SDI, the signal is reclocked
41 - 48 : HD SDI(RC PASS)Ł 41 - 48 : Ł
49 - 56 : HD SDI(RC PASS)Ł 49 - 56 : Ł
and is output.)
57 - 64 : HD SDI(RC PASS) 57 - 64 : HD SDI (RC PASS) : The input signal is bypassed

and is output as it is.

SWITCHING FIELD A:FIELD B:ODD

[F2] : FIELD (Mode which sets the crosspoint switching
F1:FORMAT F2:FIELD F3:REFERE S:Table Set Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU
field)
1. Press [F2]. The cursor moves to “SWITCH-
Example of Setting Screen (HDS-X3600)
ING FIELD” on the screen.
2. Move the cursor to ERF.A ↔ REF.B using the
SELECT SDI FORMAT HDS-X3700 V1.00 STATION NUMBER 1

DESTINATION UNIT SOURCE UNIT REFERENCE SELECT
cursor key of the keyboard.

01 - 08 : HD SDI(RC)

01 - 08 :

01 - 32 : A
3. Press [Enter]. The status changes as follows.
09
17
-
-
16
24
: HD
: HD
SDI(RC)
SDI(RC)
09
17
-
-
16
24
:
:



(ODD → EVEN → FIELD → ASYNC →
25 - 32 : HD SDI(RC) 25 - 32 :
33 - 40 : HD SDI(RC PASS) 33 - 40 : 33 - 64 : A ODD . . .)
41 - 48 : HD SDI(RC PASS) 41 - 48 :
49 - 56 : 49 - 56 :
57 - 64 : 57 - 64 :
65 - 72 : 65 - 72 : 65 - 96 : B [F3] : REFERE (Mode which selects the reference of the
73 - 80 : 73 - 80 :
81
89
-
-
88
96
:
:
81
89
-
-
88
96
:
:



97 - 128 : B
switching timing of the crosspoint in units of the
97
105
-
-
104
112
:
:
97
105
-
-
104
112
:
:




output 32 channels)
113
121
-
-
120
128
:
:
113
121
-
-
120
128
:
:



1. Press [F3]. The cursor moves to “REFER-

SWITCHING FIELD A:FIELD B:ODD ENCE SELECT” on the screen.

F1:FORMAT F2:FIELD F3:REFERE S:Table Set Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU 2. Select a channel using the cursor of the key-
board.
Example of Setting Screen (HDS-X3700) 3. Press [Enter]. The setting changes. (A ↔ B)

n
When using both the CART protocol and S-BUS in RS-
422A, set REFERENCE (switching timing) to A and
SWITCHING FIELD to ODD. If other setting is per-
formed, the switching timing is sometimes not executed
correctly.
In addition, the switching timing is sometimes not execut-
ed correctly if SWITCHING FIELD is set in other combi-
nations. For more details about the signal switching
timings, refer to “5-8. Signal Switching Timing”.

7-10 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items)

Z : SELECT SDI FORMAT

(DVS-V3232M/DVS-V6464M)

Purpose Operating Function Keys

This menu is used to set the format of signals fed to the [F1] : FORMAT (Mode which sets the signal format by 8-
input/output board of DVS-V3232M and DVS-V6464M channels)
with the control terminal. [F2] : FIELD (Mode which sets the crosspoint switching
This setting is available when the REM/LOC switch for the field)
format on each input/output board is OFF. 1. Press [F2]. The cursor will move to “SWITCH
ING FIELD” in the menu.
Setting Procedure 2. Press [Enter]. The setting will change.
1. Select menu item “Z”. (ODD → EVEN → FIELD → ASYNC → ODD···)
2. Select a channel line using the cursor to be set. (The All switching field in the switcher are deter
channels will be switched by eight channels. mined by this setting.
Displayed signal formats that are enclosed by the When a display “(ASYNC)” appears on the
round brackets as “(270 Mbps)” have been set on the screen, it indicates that the cross-point selector
board and cannot be modified with the control termi- field has been set in the ASYNC (asynchro-
nal. nous) position on the CPU-149 board (S4-1). It
3. When [Enter] is pressed, the setting will change means that the setting cannot be changed from
(“143 Mbps” → “117 Mbps” → “270 Mbps” → the control terminal.
“AUTO”).
4. Press [S] (Table Set), and the content now appeared is n
copied to the area of SDI FORMAT TABLE. To use RS-422A and S-BUS together, set the switching
5. Press [Ctrl] _ [E] to stop the display and return to the field as follows.
menu screen of the secondary station. 1 When using the S-BUS and CART protocol together :
ODD
SELECT SDI FORMAT DVS-V6464M V3.00 STATION NUMBER 1
2 When using the S-BUS and PRODUCTION
DESTINATION UNIT SOURCE UNIT
SWITCHER protocol together : FIELD
01 - 08 : 270 Mbps 01 - 08 : 270 Mbps
09 - 16 : 143 Mbps 09 - 16 : 270 Mbps
17 - 24 : 270 Mbps 17 - 24 : 270 Mbps Note that the switching timing of the CART will not be
25 - 32 : 143 Mbps 25 - 32 : 270 Mbps
33 - 40 : 360 Mbps 33 - 40 : 270 Mbps accurate if the CART and PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
41 - 48 : 540 Mbps 41 - 48 : 270 Mbps
49 - 56 :( 270 Mbps ) 49 - 56 :( 270 Mbps )
protocols are used together.
57 - 64 : AUTO 57 - 64 : 270 Mbps Switching timing is not guaranteed in the combination of

different switching fields.
SWITCHING FIELD FIELD

For details of the signal switching timing, refer to “5-8.
Signal Switching Timing”.
F1:FORMAT F2:FIELD S:Table Set Ctrl-E:RETURN TO MENU

Example of Setting Screen

n
Unless pressing [S], the data will be deleted when the
power is turned off.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 7-11

7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items)

“AUTO” stands for “AUTO LOCK” mode in which the input signal format (143/177/270/360/540 Mbps)
is automatically identified and the equipment runs on an appropriate signal format.
The signal format setting can be changed by pressing either [Enter] or [F].

[Enter]
[F]
or
[Enter] [Enter] [Enter] [F] [Enter]
143 Mbps 177 Mbps 270 Mbps AUTO 360 Mbps 540 Mbps

[F]
or
[Enter]

7-12 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 7-3. Changed Menu (Secondary Station Setting Items)

Comparison Table between Models

Item S-P1 S-P2

BVS-V3232(*1) DVS-V6464B/ BKPF-R70 DVS-128(*3) BKPF-R70A

V6464M(*2)

Dedicated CPU for communication _ 1 2 1 2

SOFT MATRIX _ _ 64 _ 128
A : DISPLAY CONTROL AREA 512 x 512 512 x 512 512 x 512 1024 x 1024 1024 x 1024
B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE 16 16 16 32 32
C : SET DESTINATION NAME 512 512 512 1024 1024
D : SET SOURCE NAME 512 512 512 1024 1024
E : SET LEVEL TABLE 8 8 8 16 16
F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER _ O O O O
G : UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER O O O O O
H : SET GLOBAL PHANTOM _ 4095 4095 2800 2800
J : NAME STYLE(Type+Num) _ O O O O
L : SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT _ 512 512 1024 1024
M : SET INHIBIT TABLE _ 512 512 1024 1024
N : SET DESCRIPTION NAME _ 1024 1024 2048 2048
O : SET TIE LINES _ 4 4 255 255
P : CHANGE PASSWORD O O O O O
Q : CHANGE CROSSPOINT 1 8 8 8 8
R : CALL SECONDARY STATION O O O O O
S : SET SOURCE ASSIGNMENT _ _ _ O O
T : SET CLOCK O O O O O
U : SELECT CONTROL MODE _ 3 1 1 1
W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG O O O O O
X : DISPLAY S-BUS COMMUNICATION O O O O O
Z : SET UNIT DETECTABLE _ O O O O
A : SET UNIT LOCATION 512 512 (1024) 512 1024 1024
K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE T T T O O
M : SET MONITOR FUNCTION _ O _ O _
Includes the following models.
(*1) DVS-V1616, BVS-A3232, BVS-V3232, DVS-TC3232, DVS-RS1616
(*2) DVS-V3232B/V3232M
(*3) HDS-X3400/X3600/X3700

The CPU performance is the relative value when the DVS-V6464B is taken as the standard value 1.
The models to which triangle mark T is set in the RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE, the mark indicates that it is partially
initialized.
The TIE LINES function of 4 and that of 255 have the different structure and different functions.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) 7-13

 Appendix

Functions and Menu Items

Function Purpose Menu item Station type

Standard setting Initializing table data K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE Primary station
Set/change password P : CHANGE PASSWORD
Set time clock T : SET CLOCK
Select warning display ON/OFF V : SELECT WARNING DISPLAY
Set type name B : SET SOURCE/DEST TYPE
Select input/output name style J : NAME STYLE
Set destination name C : SET DESTINATION NAME
Set source name D : SET SOURCE NAME
Set description name group N : SET DESCRIPTION NAME GROUP
Set level table E : SET LEVEL TABLE
Set active unit number F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER
Copy main CPU data to backup CPU G : UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER
Set physical assignment L : SET PHYSICAL ASSIGNMENT
Call secondary station R : CALL SECONDARY STATION
Set unit location A : SET UNIT LOCATION Secondary
Copy main CPU data to backup CPU G : UPDATE BACKUP CONTROLLER station (switcher)
Copy table data L : COPY TABLE DATA Secondary
Set panel status Z : SET PANEL STATUS station
Set panel table N : SET PANEL TABLE (remote control
Set available destination style O : SET AVAILABLE DESTINATION unit)
Crosspoint disable setting function M : SET INHIBIT TABLE Primary station
Global phantom function H : SET GLOBAL PHANTOM Primary station
Local phantom Set phantom function H : SET PHANTOM TABLE Secondary
function station
Protect function Set protect function C : SET DESTINATION NAME Primary station
Secret function Set secret function D: SET SOURCE NAME Primary station
Tie line management Set tie line system O : SET TIE LINES Primary station
RS-422A Select RS-422A control mode U : SELECT CONTROL MODE Primary station
9-pin remote control Call secondary station R : CALL SECONDARY STATION Primary station
Select 9-pin remote protocol U : SELECT REMOTE PROTOCOL Secondary
station

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E) A-1

 Function Purpose Menu item Station type

Monitor function Call secondary station R : CALL SECONDARY STATION Primary station
Call primary station on monitor S-BUS M : SET MONITOR FUNCTION Secondary
station
Set active unit number F : SET ACTIVE UNIT NUMBER Monitor S-BUS
Select monitor mode M : SELECT MONITOR FUNCTION primary station
Call secondary station on monitor S-BUS R : CALL SECONDARY STATION
Set available monitor unit M : SET AVAILABLE MONITOR LINE Monitor S-BUS
Set panel table N : SET PANEL TABLE secondary
Copy table data L : COPY TABLE DATA station
Display Description name S : DISPLAY DESCRIPTION NAME
Set panel status Z : SET PANEL STATUS
Others Display control area A : DISPLAY CONTROL AREA Primary station
Change crosspoint Q : CHANGE CROSSPOINT
Select indication color S : SELECT INDICATION COLOR
Display system status log W : SYSTEM STATUS LOG
Display S-BUS communication X : DISPLAY S-BUS COMMUNICATION
Display table data Y : DISPLAY TABLE DATA
Set unit detectable Z : SET UNIT DETECTABLE
Reset table data to default K : RESET TO DEFAULT TABLE Secondary
Display unit status V : DISPLAY UNIT STATUS station
Display table data Y : DISPLAY TABLE DATA
Select SDI format Z : SELECT SDI FORMAT

A-2 ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

 The material contained in this manual consists of
information that is the property of Sony Corporation.
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of
any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any
purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the
equipment described in this manual without the express
written permission of Sony Corporation.

Le matériel contenu dans ce manuel consiste en

informations qui sont la propriété de Sony Corporation.
Sony Corporation interdit formellement la copie de
quelque partie que ce soit de ce manuel ou son emploi
pour tout autre but que des opérations ou entretiens de
l’équipement à moins d’une permission écrite de Sony
Corporation.

Das in dieser Anleitung enthaltene Material besteht aus

Informationen, die Eigentum der Sony Corporation sind.
Die Sony Corporation untersagt ausdrücklich die
Vervielfältigung jeglicher Teile dieser Anleitung oder den
Gebrauch derselben für irgendeinen anderen Zweck als
die Bedienung oder Wartung der in dieser Anleitung
beschriebenen Ausrüstung ohne ausdrückliche
schriftliche Erlaubnis der Sony Corporation.

ROUTING SWITCHER SYSTEM (E)

BVS-A3232 (SY)
BVS-V3232 (SY)
DVS-128 (SY)
DVS-A3232 (EK)
DVS-RS1616 (SY)
DVS-TC3232 (SY)
DVS-V1616 (SY)
DVS-V3232B (SY)
DVS-V3232M (SY)
DVS-V6464B (SY)
DVS-V6464M (SY)
HDS-X3400 (SY)
HDS-X3600 (SY)
HDS-X3700 (SY) Printed in Japan
HDS-V3232 (JN) E Sony Corporation 2000. 7 16
3-194-351-06 Communication System Solutions Network Company ©1997